JP6432165B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win .

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

However, in such a gaming machine, there is a fear that to improve the enjoyment of the game during the current have enough becomes difficult.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine which can improve the interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is characterized in that the display means capable of displaying the production mode, the determination means for performing a predetermined determination, and the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. A bonus game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination, and a period until the determination result is indicated according to the determination result of the determination based on execution of the determination by the determination means. Discrimination period determining means for determining a certain discrimination period, a ball entry means to which a predetermined privilege is given when a game ball enters, and a first state in which a game ball can enter as a state of the ball entry means When the incoming spherical state setting means for setting at its second state entry ball game ball than the first state becomes difficult, the benefits game of 1, the entering-sphere unit by its ON sphere state setting means period der the condition Ru is the second state On the basis of the period setting means for setting the second state period and the end of the first state set last in one of the privilege games, at least during the second state period with respect to the display means Among the second state period display elements which are display elements to be displayed, at least a part of the display elements is executed by the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect displayed on the display means, and the specific effect executing means. As the type of the specific effect, the first specific effect of the aspect suggested to become the first state and the second specific effect of the aspect suggested to be less likely to be the first state than the first specific effect. When, and a type determination means for determining a first type from a plurality of types including at least, the specific effect execution unit is intended to perform the specific effect on a particular effect period determined Me pre Oh The specific effect is executed at least in the determination period of at least one or more set after the bonus game is ended, and the specific effect period is executed when the first specific effect is executed. in the first specific effect in accordance with the start of the benefits game it has been configured by directing period length to be terminated.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the display means is provided at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is advantageous to the player based on the display means capable of displaying the effect mode, the determination means for performing a predetermined determination, and the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. A determination to determine a determination period, which is a period until the determination result is displayed, based on the determination result of the determination based on execution of the determination by the determination means The period determining means, the entering means to which a predetermined privilege is given by entering a game ball, the first state in which a game ball can enter as the state of the entering means, and the first state a second state in which it becomes difficult to enter the sphere of game balls, and input sphere state setting means for setting in the award game of 1, and the state the second state before entry ball means by the input spheres state setting means setting the second state period is a period that will be A display element that is displayed for at least the second state period with respect to the display means, based on the end of the first state that is set last in one of the privilege games. Among the second state period display elements, at least a part of the display elements is displayed as the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect displayed on the display means, and as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, A plurality of first specific effects that are suggested to be in the first state and a second specific effect that is suggested to be less likely to be in the first state than the first specific effects. and a type determination means for determining a first type from a type, the specific effect execution unit state, and are not to execute the specific effect on a particular effect period determined Me pre, the specific effect is The above The bonus game is executed at least in the at least one determination period set after the classic game is finished, and the specific game period starts when the first specific game is executed. the first specific effect to suit has been configured by directing period length to be terminated.

Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in the game of Yu technique's.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal symbol, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a special variation pattern selection table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special selection table for detachment, and (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special selection table for hitting. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio lamp control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the pseudo | simulation interval effect performed after the end of jackpot and jackpot. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the pseudo interval production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed at the time of the start of a pseudo interval effect, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the pseudo interval effect at the time of jackpot. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in the special variation end display period of a pseudo interval effect, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed at the end of a pseudo interval effect. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in the special fluctuation extension display period of a pseudo interval effect, and (b) is performed when it is a big hit in the special variable extension display period of a pseudo interval effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect produced. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special fluctuation selection process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special fluctuation control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command setting process for a display performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control treatment. It is the flowchart which showed the special variation end command setting process for a display performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) showed the production start command process between rounds performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart. (A) is the flowchart which showed the special game production end command processing which is executed by MPU in the display control device, (b) showed the special fluctuation end command processing which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the period shortening process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special fluctuation control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device in the third embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 in 3rd Embodiment and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the state setting table prescribed | regulated to ROM in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically transition of the game state of. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in a special symbol in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special selection fluctuation pattern selection table in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the pseudo interval production in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the fifth embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the payout speed selection table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the payout command setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the payout control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process performed by MPU in the payout control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball control process performed by MPU in the payout control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lending control process performed by MPU in the payout control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of ROM in the main controller in the modification of 5th Embodiment, (b) is RAM of the main controller in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an electric structure. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the ball | bowl supply setting table in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball supply stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch time setting process performed by MPU of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. And, various effects such as variation effects and reach effects that are performed along with the entry to the first entrance 64 (start prize), which will be described later, are designed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “street stage” → “ It is repeatedly changed in the order of “empty stage” → “island stage” → “city stage” →. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box” or “dollar box”) that receives the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Is called. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the normal symbol (second (Design) is drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, Is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is opened, and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are four types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, “Big Jack C”, and “Big Jack D”, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened as many times as the jackpot type. The Further, after the end of the special gaming state, game value (game value) according to the jackpot type is given to the player as added value after the jackpot ends.

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for a ball to enter the first entrance 64, and as a result, a special symbol is easily drawn.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are four types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A”, “Big Jack B”, “Big Jack C”, and “Big Jack D”.

  When it becomes "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", and "big hit D", it becomes a special game state with the number of rounds corresponding to each jackpot type. Specifically, the “bonus A” is a jackpot (3R jackpot) in which the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a is opened three times, and the “jackpot B” is a special winning mouth (large opening mouth) 65a. A jackpot (4R jackpot) that is opened four times. The “big hit C” is a big hit (6R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a is opened six times, and the “big hit D” is opened in the specific winning opening (large open mouth) 65a 15 times. Jackpot (15R jackpot). In each jackpot, the length of the period (interval period) from when the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed to when the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened next is constant (10). Second). In addition, after the end of each jackpot, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases after the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery eight times. Further, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol (during special symbol change) from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 12 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, a transition to a special gaming state. It is an easy game state. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  Thereafter, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the special symbol jackpot ends, that is, from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery 12 times, This is called the probability variation period. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, the probability change period of the special symbol is shown by using the number of lotteries of the special symbol. For example, if the special symbol probability change period is 12 times until the special symbol lottery ends, it is described that the special symbol probability change period is 12 times. In addition, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot, that is, from the end of the jackpot until the end of the special symbol lottery is completed eight times. This is called the period. In order to make the explanation easy to understand, a short time period of a normal symbol is indicated by using the number of times of drawing a special symbol. For example, if it is a short time period of a normal symbol until the special symbol lottery ends eight times, it is described that the short time period of the normal symbol is eight times.

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in this embodiment, the short time period of the normal symbol and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the number of rounds at the jackpot according to the jackpot type Is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period during which the “normal symbol time-short state” is changed according to the type of jackpot may be changed. For example, when the jackpot type is “Big Jack A”, after the “Big Jack A”, the short-time state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery ends three times. "After the special symbol lottery is completed six times after the end, the short time state of the normal symbol is continued. When the" big hit C "is reached, the normal symbol is drawn until the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the" big hit C "ends. When the “short jackpot D” is continued, the short time state of the normal symbol may be continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 15 times after the “big jackpot D” is reached.

  Furthermore, instead of increasing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the first entrance 64 or releasing the electric accessory for one normal symbol is released. The number of times may be changed. Further, in this embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol short-time state”, but after the “special symbol high-probability state”, the “normal symbol short-time state” You may comprise so that it may become. Instead of the special symbol lottery count, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”. When the state shifts to the “high probability state of special symbol”, the state is continued from the end of the special symbol jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 12 times, regardless of the type of jackpot. Then, when the special symbol jackpot is not newly made until the special symbol lottery ends 12 times after the jackpot ends, the state returns to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  If a special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “special symbol high probability state” is continued, the “special symbol high probability state” is further changed after the jackpot of the new special symbol is over. Will be continued until the lottery ends 12 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “high probability state of a special symbol”, when a new jackpot is made in the second special symbol lottery, the “high probability state of a special symbol” is further changed to the new symbol. It continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 12 times after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in this case, until at least 14 lotteries of the special symbol lottery performed twice before the new jackpot and the 12 special symbol lotteries performed after the new jackpot are finished, The “high probability state of special symbol” will be continued.

  In addition, when a special symbol jackpot is reached and a transition is made from the “normal symbol normal state” to the “normal symbol time-short state”, the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the special symbol jackpot ends. Will continue until. On the other hand, after the special symbol jackpot is reached, if the special symbol jackpot is not reached by the end of the special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, the state returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”.

  If the special symbol jackpot is newly won while the “ordinary symbol hourly state” continues, the “ordinary symbol hourly state” is further increased after the special symbol jackpot ends. It continues until the lottery ends 8 times. For example, after a special symbol jackpot and a transition to the “normal symbol short-time state”, when the new special symbol wins in the fifth special symbol lottery, the “normal symbol short-time state” is further increased to the new jackpot After the end, it continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 8 times. In other words, in the present embodiment, when a new special symbol jackpot is made while the “ordinary symbol time saving state” is continued, each time the new special symbol jackpot type is selected, the time saving period (“ The duration of “short-time state of normal symbol” is updated.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) is being executed or not. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or variation is not executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (the first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times that the ball has entered is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. (For example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times) may be set.

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the jackpot D) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is a big hit, all the numbers from “0” to “9” may be set regardless of the big hit type. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform an effect (pseudo-interval effect) similar to the interval effect performed between rounds of jackpots in a predetermined period (special variation period) after the jackpot ends. Yes. In order to effectively perform this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured so that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type according to the type of main symbol displayed when the jackpot is won.

  More specifically, the period from the end of the jackpot to the end of at least eight special symbol lotteries is designated as a special variation period, and during this special variation period, the jackpot is displayed as a display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display image similar to the interval effect is displayed. In addition, the sound output from the sound output device 226 and the lighting / extinguishing control by the lamp display device 227 are set in the same manner as the jackpot interval effect. This makes it difficult for the player to know that the jackpot has once ended when the special symbol jackpot is newly changed during the change of the special symbol, and it is difficult to know how long the jackpot will last. Therefore, the game can be performed while expecting the player to continue the jackpot longer during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Note that the display image similar to the jackpot interval effect is, for example, a mode in which main symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a part of the image displayed in the jackpot interval effect. This variable display is configured such that, for example, it is difficult to distinguish the interval effect from the big hit by the player, for example, by reducing the display so as to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In the pachinko machine 10 having the above-described configuration, the jackpot type of the jackpot that is won in the low probability state of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot that allows the player to easily recognize the main symbols aligned by the variable display in the third symbol display device 81). If it is configured to be able to discriminate according to the type of main symbols that are arranged, the player will know at least how many rounds the jackpot will continue. In other words, for example, if the current jackpot is known as “big jackpot D (15R jackpot)”, the player can recognize that the jackpot will continue until at least the 15th round, so only the 15th round of the jackpot will get a prize ball. There is a risk that it will be a work for. On the other hand, if it is difficult to predict the jackpot type from the aligned main symbols as in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, each time the jackpot round ends for the player, It is possible to play a game while having a sense of expectation for the start of the round of the game (that is, that the jackpot will continue). Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when notifying that it is a jackpot by the variable display (fluctuation pattern effect), it has been configured to select all the main symbols regardless of the jackpot type, but with a specific jackpot type It is good also as a structure which provides the main symbol which is hard to be selected by the main symbol which is easy to select, or a specific jackpot type. For example, the main symbol with the number “7” is easier to align for “Big Jack D (15R jackpot)”, and “7” for “Big Jack A (3R jackpot)” and “Big Jack B (4R jackpot)” The main symbols with numbers may be difficult to align. As a result, when an effect is performed in which the main symbols with the number “7” are arranged in the variable display, the player is expected to expect “big hit D (15R big hit)” with the largest number of rounds. Can do. Accordingly, in the variable display, it is possible to make the player wish that the main symbols with the number “7” are aligned, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the player's variable display (variation pattern effect). it can.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the others. The upper third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of spheres that have not been changed (reserved spheres) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by putting out.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 37), the number of entrances is up to 4 times. The number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. You may set below (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it replaces with the display of the number of reservation balls in small area Ds1, and the aspect which changes the number of reservation balls by a part in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, or the area divided into four by the number of reservation balls (For example, the color or lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first per-type counter C2 used for the selection, the stop-type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-service stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 31). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203 i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 31).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot set by 202a, the jackpot of the special symbol is determined. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). It is divided into two types: for a period in which the symbol is in a high probability state. That is, the first per random number table 202a includes a first per random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability and a first per random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability, The number of random numbers that are jackpots in the table is different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. Note that the first per-random number table 202a1 (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability and the first per-random number table 202a2 (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability are stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random values “7, 107, 282” It is stored in the hit random number table 202a1. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, which are “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”is a first random number table for high probability. 202a2. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/10”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first per-random number table 202a1 for low probability and the random hit value that is stored in the first per-random number table 202a2 for high probability. Random numbers that are big hits are set so that they do not overlap with numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value in the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B). As shown in FIG. 8B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 16” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “17 to 31” is “jackpot B”, the jackpot type when the value is “32 to 94” is “jackpot C”, and the value is “95”. The jackpot type in the case of “˜99” is “jackpot D”. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines four types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D) based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. It is configured.

  For example, the stop type selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 99) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of release displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, 98, 99), and “reach other than front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach. Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected that are “completely out” (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not cause reach. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a random value range set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a table for a high-probability time with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely off” is easily selected. In this table, the “front / rear detachment reach” is narrowed to 98,99 and the “reach other than front / rear detachment” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “rearward / rearward detachment reach” and “reach other than front / rear detachment”. In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 and the probability is low so as to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. Table is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. Further, in the low probability state, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth out” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from when the variation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and the symbol is fixed. For example, after a symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, when the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is fixed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds + 0.4 seconds). It is written as. Based on the variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 31) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Note that a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1, and a special variation pattern selection table 202e. (See FIG. 9C) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8A).

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B), for example, as variation patterns for detachment, various types of “displacement (for a long time)”, “disconnection (for a short time)”, “disconnection normal reach”, “ “Outgoing Super Reach” and “Outgoing Special Reach” are stipulated, and “Hit Normal Reach”, “Hit Super Reach”, and “Hit Special Reach” are stipulated as variation patterns for jackpots. Then, a variation pattern is selected from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d according to the predicted lottery result or the predicted stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot). Note that, as the variation time of the variation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is defined.

  The special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) includes a special variation period in which the above-described pseudo-interval effect is executed (that is, a period from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery is performed eight times, Alternatively, a variation pattern to be selected is defined in a period until a next jackpot is reached within 8 times and the first round of the jackpot is started). Although details will be described later, the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) is configured to select a variation pattern of a variation period determined for each number of lots of special symbols. The special variation period can be the same period (8 seconds) each time. Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a period (opening period) from the start of the big hit to the start of the first round is 2 seconds. Therefore, when the next jackpot is reached until the special symbol lottery is performed 8 times after the jackpot ends, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the next jackpot is 10 times each. Can be seconds. In other words, the period until the next round of jackpot is started after the pseudo-interval effect can be made to coincide with the execution period (10 seconds) of the interval effect executed during the jackpot. Therefore, since it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect, it is difficult for the player to know that the jackpot has ended, and it is difficult to know how long the jackpot will last. be able to. Therefore, during the jackpot and during the pseudo-interval effect, the player can be allowed to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d and the special variation pattern selection table 202e, it is not always necessary to define a period from the start of variation to the symbol determination. For example, the period during which the symbol is stopped and displayed may be set to a fixed value (for example, 0.5 seconds), and only the period in which the symbol is changing may be set as the changing period. Further, the period in which the symbols are changing and the period in which the symbols are stopped and displayed may be defined in different tables.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number that becomes the normal symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) per normal symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol value. When the winning random number value set by the winning random number table coincides with the winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol is hit. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state), and at a high probability that the normal symbol is more likely to hit than the low probability (normal symbol of the normal symbol) The number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (a), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is “5-28”. These random values are stored in a random table per normal symbol for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared to the normal symbol having a low probability, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64. Note that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened only “one second × two times” when the normal symbol is hit. What is necessary is just to set time and frequency | count arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 31).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 31), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 30) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a probable change. It includes a counter 203e, an hour / counter counter 203f, a special variation counter 203g, a prefetching probability variation counter 203h, and a counter buffer 203i.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (1 area to reserved 4th area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special control lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the start winning, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3). The prediction is described as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. It is stored in 223a.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 has a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize Then, various information (whether it is determined, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated).

  Then, the predicted various information is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a winning information command, and the sound lamp control device 113 receives the various information (whether it is determined, the stop type, the variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as a winning information. The information is stored in the information storage area 223a. Further, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, and the value of the special variation number counter 223e, the above-described pseudo interval effect is changed into eight variation patterns. It is determined whether the production is ended or the production is continued more than 8 times. Specifically, during the special variation period (that is, from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery is performed 8 times), the special symbol of the 9th to 12th times from the end of the jackpot by prefetching When it is determined that a big hit is made in the lottery, the pseudo-interval effect is extended until the big win. This makes it possible for the player to predict whether or not the jackpot will continue depending on the length of the production time, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot and the pseudo interval can be improved.

  In this way, main controller 110 predicts various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning from each counter value acquired in accordance with the starting winning ( For the complicated processes such as the process of deciding whether or not to extend the pseudo-interval effect based on various information (whether it is appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) This is done with the device 113. Thereby, the process in the main controller 110 can be concentrated on the lottery process for drawing the gaming state to be transitioned based on the entrance to the first entrance 64, which is the most important process of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the MPU 221 having a high processing capability is used for the audio lamp control device 113, various modes of pseudo-interval effects can be set.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (holding first area to holding number 1). Among the vacant areas of (4 areas), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for a normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the holding first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of held balls for variable display increases, the maximum value of 8 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 22).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 22 and S605 in FIG. 26). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) for the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes the normal entrance 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 27).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right normal entrance 67, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S805 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S803 in FIG. 28: No).

  The probability changing counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability changing state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is in a probable variation state. If the value of the probability variation counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The probability changing counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and is the timing at which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed in the main round in the main control device 110 (that is, the jackpot end timing) 12 is set every time it is determined that In other words, when the special symbol is a big hit, 12 is simply set regardless of the value of the probability variation counter 203e. Thereafter, while the value of the probability variation counter 203e is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect ends (S216 in FIG. 22).

  When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the value of the probability variation counter 203e is referred to. If the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 0, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first per-random number table 202a1 for low probability.

  The hour / minute counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the short / medium counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is the timing at which the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a is closed in the main round in the main control unit 110 (that is, the jackpot end timing) 8 is set every time it is determined that That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, 8 is simply set regardless of the value of the hour / middle counter 203f. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted every time the special symbol variation effect is finished until the value of the hour / short counter 203f becomes 0 (S218 in FIG. 22).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour / medium counter 203f is referred to. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / medium counter 203f is 0, the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the random symbol table for the normal symbol for the low probability (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 27).

  The special fluctuation counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the special fluctuation period is described above. In selecting a variation pattern effect mode, if the value of the special variation counter 203g is equal to or greater than 1, it indicates a special variation period (ie, a pseudo interval effect execution period). With reference to (see FIG. 9C), the variation pattern effect mode is selected. On the other hand, if the value of the special variation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that it is outside the special variation period, so the variation pattern effect mode is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d. Since the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is cleared to 0 when the RAM erase switch 122 is operated and the power is turned on, the RAM erase switch 122 is operated and the power is turned on when the hall is opened. And a normal state (a state in which a variation pattern effect mode is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d).

  As described above, the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) selects the variation pattern of the variation period determined for each value of the special variation counter 203g (that is, for each special symbol lottery). Because it is configured, special fluctuation period (the period from the end of the jackpot until the end of the eight fluctuation patterns, or the next jackpot within 8 times, until the jackpot starts Can be set to the same period (8 seconds) each time. Therefore, it will be the next jackpot by the time of the special symbol lottery eight times after the jackpot ends, the period until the first round of the jackpot starts (8 seconds until the jackpot starts, and the opening period 2 seconds) and the execution period (10 seconds) of the interval effect executed during the jackpot. Therefore, since it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect, it is difficult for the player to know that the jackpot has ended, and it is difficult to know how long the jackpot will last. be able to. Therefore, during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, the player can be allowed to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is used when the pachinko machine 10 pre-reads the lottery result of the special symbol based on the winning data (each value of the counters C1 to C3) acquired according to the start winning. Whether the winning data should be analyzed as being in a probable state (high probability state of special symbol), or the winning data is analyzed as if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbol (low probability state of special symbol) It is a counter that indicates what should be done.

  When the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 1 or more, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability changing state, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. On the other hand, when the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 0, the winning data is analyzed assuming that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is prefetched. This pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is initialized to zero at the time of initial setting of the RAM (see S1014 in FIG. 30), and is set to 12 every time it is determined that the pre-read lottery result is a special symbol jackpot. (Refer to S612 in FIG. 26). That is, when prefetching is a special symbol jackpot, 12 is simply set regardless of the value of the prefetching probability changing counter 203h. Thereafter, while the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted every time the pre-reading of the lottery for the special symbol is completed (see S614 in FIG. 26).

  When the pre-reading of the lottery in the special symbol is performed, if the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 1 or more, the first random number table 202a2 for the high probability time, the stop type selection table for the high probability time, And each table of the special symbol jackpot type table is compared with the winning data acquired in accordance with the starting winning prize. On the other hand, if the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 0, the first winning random number table 202a1 for the low probability time, the stop type selection table for the low probability time, and the special symbol jackpot type table, and the start winning prize The winning data acquired in accordance with is compared.

  Returning to FIG. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with the ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 8A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 has a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, a second per random number table 202c, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, and a special fluctuation pattern selection. At least a table 202e is provided.

  As described above, the first per-random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined. When the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first per random number table 202a includes a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability (a first per random number table 202a1 for a low probability), and a high value of the special symbol. There is a table (first high random number table 202a2 for high probability) to determine whether or not the special symbol is a big hit at the probability, the number of random numbers that will be a big hit included in each table is different Yes. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B) is a data table in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are set for each jackpot type. . As shown in FIG. 8B, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the first hit type counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 16, the current big hit is “big hit A (3R big hit)”. If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 17 to 31, the current big hit is determined as “big hit B (4R big hit)”. Further, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 32 to 94, the current big hit is determined as “big hit C (6R big hit)”, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 95 to 99. If there is, the current jackpot is determined as “jackpot D (15R jackpot)”.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9A) is a data table in which the hit determination value for the normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the normal symbol has a low probability (in the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the normal symbol time short state), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit when the value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened “for 1 second × 2 times”.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B) is a data table used to determine the variation pattern display mode, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9 (b), the selection table for off-time 202d1 for selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is off and the lottery result of the special symbol are won. A hit-time selection table 202d2 for selecting a variation pattern in the case of being present is defined at least.

  The special variation selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern in the special variation period (that is, the execution period of the pseudo interval effect). In this special variation selection table 202e, a plurality of different tables corresponding to special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, the special selection table 202d1 for off-time selection (see FIG. 10 (a)) for selecting the fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place and the lottery result of the special symbol are wins. A special selection table for winning hour 202e2 (see FIG. 10 (b)) for selecting a variation pattern in the case is defined. With reference to FIG. 10, the special selection table for off time 202e1 and the special selection table for winning time 202e2 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 10 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special selection table for off-time 202e1 specified in the special variation selection table 202e, and FIG. 10 (b) shows the specified contents of the special selection table for winning hour 202e2. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the special selection table 202e1 for losing time defines the number of special symbol lotteries and the variation pattern mode (variation time) to be selected in association with each other. Specifically, if the special symbol lottery that was performed first or second after the end of the jackpot is missed, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. (Special variation A) is selected. In addition, when the special symbol lottery performed at the third or fourth time after the end of the jackpot is missed, a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery performed 5th to 8th after the end of the jackpot is missed, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. The

  In other words, if all 8 special symbol lotteries have been missed after the big hit, the total of 8 variation pattern effects will take 8 seconds (2 seconds x 2 + 1 seconds x 2 + 0.5 seconds x 4). Run. Furthermore, the end of the pseudo-interval effect is displayed in 2 seconds after the end of the eight fluctuation pattern effects. Thereby, the production period of the pseudo interval effect performed after the end of the jackpot can be fixed to 10 seconds. Therefore, since the production period of the pseudo-interval effect and the execution period of the interval effect executed during the jackpot can be matched each time, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect. be able to. Therefore, during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, the player can be allowed to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The number of special symbol lotteries is determined based on the value of the special variation counter 203g. As described above, the special variation counter 203g is set to 8 at the jackpot end timing, and is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, for example, if the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 8, since the special symbol lottery has not been performed once after the big hit, it is determined that the current special symbol lottery is the first lottery. . Further, for example, if the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 3, it indicates that the special symbol lottery has been executed five times after the end of the jackpot, so it is determined that the current special symbol lottery is the sixth lottery. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the special selection table for winning hour 202e2 also defines the number of special symbol lotteries and the mode (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected in association with each other. . Specifically, when the special symbol lottery performed for the first time after the end of the jackpot is a win, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation D) having a fluctuation time of 8 seconds regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Is selected. In addition, when a big hit is made for the second time after the jackpot ends, a variation pattern (special variation E) with a variation time of 6 seconds is selected. Is selected, and if a big hit is made for the fourth time after the jackpot is finished, a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation G) having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected. In addition, when the big hit is the fifth time after the big hit, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation A) is selected with a variation time of 2 seconds, and when the big hit is the sixth time after the big hit, the fluctuation time is 1. If a fluctuation pattern of 5 seconds (special fluctuation H) is selected and a big hit is made at the seventh time after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation pattern of one second (special fluctuation B) is selected and the eighth time after the end of the jackpot In the case of a big hit, a variation pattern (special variation C) having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected.

  Each variation time defined in the special selection table for winning hour 202e is configured such that the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the start of the next jackpot is 8 seconds. For example, when the special symbol lottery is won for the third time after the jackpot is over, the variation time corresponding to the first and second special symbol lottery is changed from the special selection table 202e1 for off-time. Is selected for each 2 seconds variation pattern (special variation A). Further, as a variation pattern corresponding to the third special symbol lottery, a variation pattern (special variation F) having a variation time of 4 seconds is selected from the hit special selection table 202e2. Therefore, the total of the three fluctuation times is 8 seconds (2 seconds × 2 + 4 seconds).

  By configuring in this way, even if the number of lottery of special symbols within 8 times after winning the jackpot, it will be 8 seconds until the next jackpot and 2 seconds of the opening period of the jackpot (total A pseudo-interval effect can be performed for 10 seconds). In other words, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won in the special variation period, the period of the pseudo-interval effect can be made the same, so it is difficult to understand whether or not the jackpot will continue as a result of the pseudo-interval effect. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player confirm the pseudo-interval effect until the end while expecting the jackpot to continue after the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, the interest in the pseudo interval effect of the player can be improved.

  In addition, even when the special symbol lottery number of times within 8 times after the jackpot ends, the execution period of the pseudo interval effect and the execution period of the interval effect executed during the jackpot are the same period ( 10 seconds). Therefore, since it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect, it is difficult for the player to know that the jackpot has ended, and it is difficult to know how long the jackpot will last. be able to. Therefore, the game can be performed while expecting the player to continue the jackpot longer during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 pays out the winning balls one by one continuously. More specifically, every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation), one prize ball is paid out. Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). Further, every time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is paused for a predetermined period (1 second). Thereby, for example, when a large amount of prize balls need to be paid out, such as during a big hit, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from paying out the prize balls without taking a break and to prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the failure of the pachinko machine 10 due to, for example, the resin portion or the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 being melted due to heat generated by the dispensing motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable part of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the part touched by the player such as the lower tray unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. This can be suppressed. The number of payouts and the payout pause period until the payout motor 216 stops paying out the prize balls are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout motor 216 may be configured to pause payout every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out. For example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuation pattern effects ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern table 222a and a special variation pattern table 222b. The variation pattern table 222a and the special variation pattern table 222b are referred to in order to select a detailed aspect of the variation pattern effect based on the rough variation pattern effect notified from the main controller 110 by the variation pattern command. It is a table. The variation pattern table 222a is referred to when selecting a variation pattern effect mode to be performed from the ninth time after the jackpot ends (that is, after the end of the pseudo-interval effect). On the other hand, the special variation pattern table 222b is referred to when selecting a variation pattern effect mode to be performed within eight times after the jackpot ends (that is, within the execution period of the pseudo interval effect). Note that, as described above, the variation pattern effect performed in the pseudo-interval effect refers to an aspect in which the main symbol is reduced and variably displayed, for example, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval effect and the pseudo-interval effect that are a big hit. Therefore, when the special symbol wins again after the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to make it feel as if the special gaming state has continued from the previous jackpot. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d. Is provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize From the above, various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the special variation period ends, the winning information storage area 223a is referred to, and the special symbol lottery is executed four times after the special variation period ends. Is determined. When it is determined that there is a jackpot, the pseudo interval effect is extended until the jackpot is started. This makes it possible for the player to predict whether or not the jackpot will continue depending on the length of the production time, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot and the pseudo interval can be improved.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls for variation display is added by entering the first entrance 64, or in the main controller 110, variation display in a special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 36). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 37), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 39). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 39). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  Returning to FIG. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Effect) and continuous notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, the flow of the pseudo-interval effect executed in the jackpot and the special fluctuation period after the jackpot ends will be described. FIG. 12 shows a case where the jackpot is ended in the pseudo-interval effect that is executed after the “big jackpot D (15R jackpot)” is finished (that is, all the lottery results of the special symbols eight times after the jackpot finish are missed). FIG.

  The upper diagram in FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the transition of the effect executed before and after the jackpot and the transition of the state of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. As shown in FIG. 12, when the symbol stopped and displayed after the symbol variation by the variation pattern effect is a symbol corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is started. When the jackpot is started, an opening effect of 2 seconds is executed. In this opening effect, an effect that congratulates that a new jackpot has been won is executed. For example, a boy who is normally displayed in the sub display area Ds2 (see FIG. 4B) is displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81, and congratulates the player with a congratulations. It is a production to describe.

  When this opening effect ends, the first round effect is started. In each jackpot round, since the player can obtain a larger amount of prize balls (game value) than usual, an effect suggesting that a prize ball (game value) is obtained is executed in the round effect. For example, a boy who is normally displayed in the sub-display area Ds2 (see FIG. 4B) enters a treasure room filled with gold and silver treasure and acquires a lot of treasure and delights. Etc. When the first round is started, the special winning opening (large opening) 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won). The The player can obtain a larger amount of prize balls (game value) than usual when the ball is awarded to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  After that, when a closing condition (for example, 30 seconds has elapsed or 10 balls have been won) for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is established, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed and an interval effect is produced. Is executed. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20, but this interval effect continues for 10 seconds, and an effect of notifying whether the next round is started is performed depending on whether the door is opened or not. . This door is, for example, the door of the next treasure room. Then, when the effect of opening the door is performed and the start of the next round is notified, the round effect of the second round is started and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened. In the second round, as in the first round, for example, the player can get a prize ball, for example, a boy enters the treasure room through the door and wins a lot of treasure. An effect that suggests is performed.

  Then, when a closing condition (for example, 30 seconds has elapsed or 10 balls have been won) for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is established, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set as in the first round. While being closed, an interval effect is executed. As described above, this interval effect is an effect of notifying whether or not the next round is started depending on whether or not the door is opened.

  In the third and subsequent rounds, the round effect and the interval effect are alternately executed in conjunction with the open / close state of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  Note that the round effect does not necessarily have to be executed in every round. For example, in an even-numbered round, a boy performs an effect of acquiring a large amount of treasure in a treasure room (first round effect), and in an odd-numbered round, a girl (not shown) relaxes on a resort beach (second round effect) ) May be executed. Further, for example, the above two types of effects may be selected randomly in each round. Moreover, you may provide the production | presentation which can be selected only in rounds other than the last round of jackpot. For example, in rounds other than the last round, the second round effect described above is configured to be selected with a lower probability than the first round effect, and only the first round effect is selected in the big round final round. You may comprise so that it may be performed. By configuring in this way, the second round effect is displayed, so that the player can recognize that one or more jackpot rounds remain. That is, only the second round effect is displayed, and it can be recognized that the opportunity to obtain a large amount of prize balls is left one or more times, so that the second round effect is executed, Great satisfaction can be given to the player.

  In addition, in the 15th round, which is the final round of the “big hit D (15R big hit)”, the closing conditions (for example, 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won) for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are established. When the jackpot ends, a pseudo-interval effect is executed. In this pseudo-interval effect, the same effect as the above-described interval effect (that is, the effect that the boy opens the door) is executed 8 seconds after the effect is started. After that (that is, 8 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the pseudo-interval effect), basically, an effect that succeeds in opening the door or an effect that fails to open the door is executed. Although details will be described later, when the variation pattern effect of the special symbol is executed during the pseudo interval effect, the main symbol is reduced in the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the player). When the variation pattern effect is executed, the change pattern effect is executed (in a manner that is difficult to notice).

  The control during the pseudo-interval effect will be described in detail with reference to the lower diagram of FIG. As shown at the bottom of FIG. 12, a special variation period is set after the jackpot. In this special variation period, as described above, a variation pattern effect mode is selected from the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C). In the example of FIG. 12, since the special symbol lottery of 8 times after the end of the jackpot is all missed, all of the 8 patterns of variation pattern effects are the special selection table 202e1 for when missed (see FIG. 10 (a)). Selected from. In other words, in the variation pattern effect that is performed the first time and the second time after the end of the jackpot, a variation pattern (special variation A) with a variation time of 2 seconds (design variation 1.6 seconds + stop display 0.4 seconds) is selected. In the variation pattern effect that is performed for the third and fourth times after the jackpot, a variation pattern (special variation B) with a variation time of 1 second (design variation 0.6 seconds + stop display 0.4 seconds) is selected. In the variation pattern effect performed at the fifth to eighth times after the end of the jackpot, a variation pattern (special variation C) having a variation time of 0.5 seconds (design variation 0.1 seconds + final display 0.4 seconds) is selected. The

  That is, after the jackpot is finished, the eight fluctuation pattern effects are executed over a total of 8 seconds (2 seconds × 2 + 1 seconds × 2 + 0.5 seconds × 4). As a result, the period (special fluctuation period) in which the eight fluctuation pattern effects are executed after the jackpot is completed can be fixed to 8 seconds. Therefore, since the execution period of the pseudo interval effect and the execution period of the interval effect executed during the jackpot can be matched each time, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect. be able to. Therefore, during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, the player can be allowed to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, after all eight fluctuation pattern effects have been completed, an end effect of 2 seconds for ending the pseudo-interval effect is executed. Specifically, by performing the above-mentioned production that fails to open the door, the next round is not started (that is, the previous round was the last round of jackpot) to the player Suggest. When the end effect is being executed, if the variation pattern effect is being executed in a manner reduced to the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81, the end effect is reduced and executed. The fluctuation pattern effect that has been returned is returned to the normal display size. That is, returning to the mode illustrated in FIG. 4B, the variation pattern effect is executed. As described above, after the special variation period has elapsed (that is, the special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot), the variation pattern effect is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d. Further, the variation pattern selection table 202d defines a variation pattern effect mode of 5 to 30 seconds. Therefore, the variation pattern effect that is executed after the special variation period ends has a longer variation time than the end effect (2 seconds). In this case, if the variation pattern effect that is being executed remains in a reduced form despite the fact that the end effect has elapsed, most of the third symbol display device 81 is not displayed. In some cases, the player may mistakenly assume that the pachinko machine 10 has malfunctioned. Therefore, after the pseudo-interval effect is completed, the display mode of the variation pattern effect is configured to return to the normal size, thereby preventing the player from misidentifying that a malfunction has occurred in the gaming machine.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the case where it becomes a big hit again after a pseudo interval production is demonstrated. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a case where the first special symbol lottery is made after the jackpot ends, and FIG. 13B is a third special symbol after the jackpot ends. FIG. 13C is a diagram showing a case where a jackpot is won in the twelfth special symbol lottery after the jackpot is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (a), when a big win is made in the first special symbol lottery after the big win is over, the fluctuation time is determined from the special selection table for winning hour 202e2 (see FIG. 10 (b)). A variation pattern effect of 8 seconds is selected. Thereby, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the next jackpot can be set to 8 seconds. Also, a period of 2 seconds (opening period) is provided from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round. Therefore, the period from the end of the jackpot until the first round of the next jackpot is started (the period of the pseudo-interval effect) is matched with the execution period of the interval effect that is executed during the jackpot (10 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, the player can be allowed to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  When the special symbol lottery is performed for the third time after the jackpot is over, the variation pattern effect mode executed for the first time and the second time is selected from the special selection table for off-time 202e1. . In addition, the mode of the variation pattern effect executed for the third time is selected from the special selection table for winning hour 202e2. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13B, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected as the variation pattern effect to be executed first and second after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot ends. Since a variation pattern effect with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected as the variation pattern effect to be executed for the third time after that, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the next jackpot should be 8 seconds Can do. Therefore, the period from the end of the jackpot until the first round of the next jackpot is started (the period of the pseudo-interval effect) is matched with the execution period of the interval effect that is executed during the jackpot (10 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval, the player can be allowed to play the game while expecting the jackpot to continue for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, if it is determined by prefetching that all of the 8 special symbol lotteries have been missed after the jackpot has ended, and at the end of the special variable period, it will be the fourth jackpot after the end of the special variable period. All aspects of the variation pattern effect during the special variation period are selected from the special selection table for off-time 202e1. As a result, in the variation pattern effect performed for the first time and the second time after the end of the jackpot, a variation pattern (special variation A) having a variation time of 2 seconds is selected and performed for the third and fourth times after the end of the jackpot. In the variation pattern effect, a variation pattern (special variation B) having a variation time of 1 second is selected, and in the variation pattern effect performed at the fifth to eighth times after the big hit, the variation pattern (special variation B) is performed. Variation C) is selected. That is, after the jackpot is finished, the eight fluctuation pattern effects are executed over a total of 8 seconds (2 seconds × 2 + 1 seconds × 2 + 0.5 seconds × 4).

  In addition, the mode of the variation pattern effect executed for the first to third times after the end of the special variation period is selected from the selection table for off time 202d1, and the variation pattern effect executed for the fourth time after the end of the special variation period. The mode is selected from the selection table for winning hour 202d2. In this case, even after the special change period ends, the pseudo-interval effect is extended until the next jackpot. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 performs control so that the pseudo-interval effect is continued over twelve fluctuation pattern effects after the big hit ends. This makes it possible for the player to predict whether or not the jackpot will continue depending on the length of the production time, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot and the pseudo interval can be improved. The interval effect period and the pseudo-interval effect period are not limited to 10 seconds, and can be arbitrarily determined, for example, 5 seconds or 15 seconds.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  In this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is stored in the character ROM 234. As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 40) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 40) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 17) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 40). Since these images are desirably displayed promptly after the power is turned on, they are composed of simple display images with a smaller amount of data compared to the image data that is normally displayed.

  When the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b, the remaining data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is subsequently stored. The image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen, the “◯” symbol power-on variation image and the “X” symbol power-on variation image at the same position as the “◯” symbol are alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is “special symbol jackpot”, “○” symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is “out of special symbol”, “×” symbol is displayed after stopping the changing effect Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the “◯” symbol and the “×” symbol are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the entrance to the first entrance 64 has occurred, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to the interval effect, the pseudo-interval effect, and the demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If the jackpot is C or jackpot D, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The interval effect is an effect executed between the end of each jackpot round and the start of the next round. As described above, the pseudo-interval effect is an effect that is executed after the end of the jackpot, and the same effect as the interval effect is executed. If the start condition is satisfied during the pseudo-interval effect, the variable effect is reduced and displayed at the lower right of the screen.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the interval effect, the pseudo interval effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the top address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 15) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. . Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 16 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 16).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 16, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2005 in FIG. 40). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3705 in FIG. 51 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 42B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 42B) and a simple display setting process (FIG. 42 (b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 43 to 47) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 51A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 17), which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) in which the drawing instruction content is described is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 17), which will be described later, with the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the image rendering process for one frame (FIG. 42B). ), The pointer update process (see S3305 in FIG. 48) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 17), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame. As shown in FIG. Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Based on the image and a warning image for notifying the occurrence of an error, etc., detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 42B). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3307 in FIG. 48). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 52). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 52). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 53).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 42B) is executed (see S3902 in FIG. 53).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  Next, an example of a pseudo-interval effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, a pseudo-interval effect that is executed after the “big hit A (3R big hit)” is completed will be described as an example. FIG. 18A is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect executed at the start of the pseudo-interval effect. As shown in FIG. 18A, a horizontally long rectangular area is provided in the upper left part of the third symbol display device 81, and the number of rounds digested until the pseudo-interval effect is started is displayed inside the area. It is configured to be. In this example, since the pseudo-interval effect is executed after the big hit (big hit A) with three rounds, the characters “ROUND3” are displayed in a rectangular area. In addition, a boy appears in the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, and an effect of finding the door displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In the pseudo-interval effect, an effect in which the boy tries to open this door is executed.

  In the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81, the variation pattern effect is reduced (that is, displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize). The difference between the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the pseudo-interval effect and the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the interval effect executed during the jackpot is the variation pattern effect. It is only a point that is reduced and displayed. That is, since the interval effect is performed during the big hit, no special symbol lottery is performed and the variation pattern effect is not executed, so that nothing is displayed in the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, except that the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed, the same display image is displayed for the interval effect and the pseudo-interval effect, and the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed so that it is difficult to view. . Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval effect and the pseudo interval effect.

  Note that the method for making it difficult to visually recognize the variation pattern effect is not limited to this. For example, during the pseudo-interval effect, the change pattern effect may be displayed in a translucent manner to make it difficult to view. Further, not only during the pseudo interval effect but also during the jackpot interval effect, the pseudo variation pattern effect may be reduced and displayed on the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed on the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, the reduced display portion may be configured to be always hidden by the electric accessory or the like. Further, it may be configured such that the electric accessory operates only during the jackpot interval effect and the pseudo interval effect, and hides the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. These can make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval effect and the pseudo-interval effect.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern effect is simply reduced and displayed in the lower right part, but may be configured to be displayed in a different manner. For example, during the pseudo-interval effect, the main symbol may be displayed with a symbol other than a number, so that different modes may be used. Thereby, even if the player notices that the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed during the special variation period, it can be difficult to understand whether the result of the variation pattern effect is a hit or miss. In other words, it can be difficult to determine whether the jackpot is started again or not until the result of the pseudo-interval effect is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to observe the result of the pseudo interval effect with interest.

  Further, during the special variation period, the stop display period may be extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds). As a result, even if the player notices that the variation pattern effect is displayed in a reduced size during the special variation period, the result of the variation pattern effect becomes difficult to see, and for the player, it is constantly during the special variation period. You can make it feel as if the symbol has been reduced and continues to fluctuate. That is, it can be difficult to understand whether the result of the variation pattern effect executed during the special variation period is a hit or miss. Therefore, until the result of the pseudo-interval effect is confirmed, it can be difficult to understand whether the jackpot is started again or not. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to observe the result of the pseudo interval effect with interest.

  On the other hand, the symbol variation period may be configured to be extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds) so that the player can hardly recognize that the symbol is varying. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the lower right part is displayed only as a series of meaningless numbers, and whether the result of the variation pattern production performed during the special variation period is correct or not. It can be difficult to understand. Further, when the symbol variation period is shortened, a fake effect may be displayed during the stop display period. For example, the stop symbol may be displayed for a moment, and the fake symbol variation may be executed for the remaining time. Moreover, you may comprise so that a symbol may become transparent during a stop display. As a result, it can be difficult to understand whether the result of the variation pattern effect executed during the special variation period is a hit or miss, so will the jackpot start again until the result of the pseudo interval effect is confirmed? , It can be difficult to understand whether it is a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to observe the result of the pseudo interval effect with interest.

  Returning to FIG. 18, the description will be continued. When the special symbol is a big hit during the special variation period, as shown in FIG. 18 (b), in the pseudo-interval effect, the door that the boy was trying to open is opened, and “+1 ROUND” is displayed from the door. The production that appears. Thereby, since the player can easily recognize that a new jackpot new round is started, the player can be pleased. The effect of opening the door is executed during a period from the start of the next jackpot until the first round of the next jackpot starts. In addition, when it is a big hit again through the pseudo interval effect, the display of the number of rounds is configured to be displayed from the continuation of the last round of the big hit that ended last time. Therefore, after the display of “+1 ROUND” appears in the example of FIG. 18B (when the jackpot is again in the special fluctuation period after the “big jackpot A (three round jackpot)”), “4ROUND” is displayed. Thereafter, as the number of rounds increases, the display of the area for displaying the number of rounds provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81 also increases by one.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is not a big hit in the special variation period, in the special variation end display period (see FIG. 12) after the end of the special variation period, as shown in FIG. There is an effect in which the door cannot be opened and crying out. Furthermore, after the effect that the boy begins to cry, as shown in FIG. 19B, an effect is performed in which a woman appears on the third symbol display device 81 and the characters “See you!” Are displayed. The By displaying in this way, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot has ended. The effect during the special variation period is the same as the case where the big hit was made during the special variation, and only the effect executed after the end of the special variation period (that is, the effect informing the result of the pseudo interval effect) It is configured to execute in different modes depending on whether or not. By configuring in this way, it is possible to share the effect for 8 seconds that is executed during the special variation period, regardless of whether or not it is a big hit during the special variation period. The capacity of the ROM 234 can be reduced.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit during the special variation period, and it is determined that the special symbol will be won by lottery within four times by prefetching, the production of the boy crying in FIG. 19 (a) After that, the effect shown in FIG. 20B is executed. That is, a rectangular area appears in the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters “Open the door with repeated button strokes!” Are displayed. Further, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, an image of a hand pressing the frame button 22 is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the chance to continue the big hit is left, and to participate in the performance by pressing the frame button 22.

  The effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 20A) continues until the variation pattern effect that is a big hit is executed. And the effect (refer FIG.18 (b)) by which a door is opened is performed in 2 seconds before the end of the variation pattern effect which becomes a big hit. Furthermore, in the period (opening period) from the big hit to the start of the first round, a woman appears as shown in FIG. Production is performed. By this effect, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot continues.

  In addition, the effect performed in the interval effect and the pseudo-interval effect is not limited to the effect of opening the door, but suggests that the jackpot will continue (or that the jackpot has once ended and became a new jackpot) As long as an effect to perform and an effect suggesting that the jackpot ends are provided, the aspect of the effect may be arbitrarily determined. For example, a teammate of justice performs an action to fight against the enemy, suggesting that the jackpot will continue (or that the jackpot has once ended and a new jackpot has ended) By defeating, it may be configured to suggest that the jackpot ends.

  Further, the effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 20A) is not necessarily executed after the effect that the boy starts crying. After the effect that the boy begins to cry, another effect may be executed, and then an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 20A) may be executed. For example, an effect that a boy finds another door may be performed, and then an effect prompting the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 20A) may be performed. Further, in this case, the time until the next jackpot is determined by pre-reading, and the timing for starting the execution (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 is determined in advance. May be. Thereby, the execution period of the effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 can be set to the same period every time. Therefore, when the time until the big hit is long, an effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 20A) continues to be displayed for a long time, and the player is prevented from getting tired of pressing the frame button. It is possible to perform the effect only for a period appropriate to execute the effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 20A).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the big hit is not made during the special fluctuation period, the ninth and subsequent fluctuation pattern effects are selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d after the end of the big hit. It is not limited to this. For example, in the 9th to 12th special symbol lottery (that is, the remaining period of the high probability state of the special symbol after the special variation period ends), the variation pattern effect mode (variation time) is selected from a different data table. You may comprise so that it may select. For example, when the 9th special symbol lottery result is out of place, a variation pattern effect of 2 seconds may be selected without fail. Thereby, when notifying the end of the jackpot as a result of the pseudo-interval effect, 2 seconds that are the effect period of the notification effect of the end (see FIGS. 19A and 19B) and the ninth variation pattern effect The fluctuation time can be matched. In other words, the end timing of the effect informing the end of the jackpot (see FIGS. 19A and 19B) can be matched with the end timing of the ninth variation pattern effect. Therefore, until the ninth variation pattern effect, the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed in the lower right part of the third symbol display device 81, and in the tenth variation pattern effect, the normal pattern is used from the start of the effect. Since it is only necessary to execute the variation pattern effect, there is no need to cancel the reduced display in the middle of the variation pattern effect. Therefore, display control can be simplified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball that is a big hit by prefetching at the end of the special variation period, an effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the button to be pressed is executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit during a special fluctuation period, an effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the user to press a button using the big hit opening period is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 10%). It may be configured. Specifically, at the start of the opening effect, the effect shown in FIG. 19A is performed for the boy to cry, and then the effect that prompts the button to be pressed (see FIG. 20A) is displayed in the opening period. You may comprise so that it may perform by remaining time. Further, in the jackpot for executing the button pressing in the opening period (see FIG. 20A), the opening period is set to be longer than 2 seconds (for example, 10 seconds) and the button is pressed. (See FIG. 20A) may be displayed longer. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the jackpot will continue if the button is pressed, thereby further increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  Further, even when there is no holding ball that is a big hit, an effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the user to press the button may be executed with a certain probability (for example, 5%). By configuring in this way, it is not possible to know whether or not the jackpot will continue if an effect that prompts the button to be pressed (see FIG. 20A) appears. It can be interesting. Furthermore, even when the result of the effect that prompts the user to press the button (see FIG. 20A) is out of place, the effect is finished in accordance with the end of any of the ninth to twelfth variation pattern effects. May be. In this case, when it becomes a deviation, it may be configured that the effect is easily ended in accordance with the end of the small number of fluctuation pattern effects. That is, the probability that the result of the effect of prompting the user to press the button at the end of the ninth variation pattern effect (see FIG. 20 (a)) is notified is set high, and the twelfth variation pattern effect is generated. The probability of being informed that it is off may be set low in accordance with the end of. By configuring in this way, the player can recognize that the expectation that the jackpot will continue is higher as the effect of pressing the button (see FIG. 20A) continues for a longer time. Therefore, the player can press the button while hoping that the effect of prompting the button to be pressed (see FIG. 20A) is continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through-gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S209: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol stop symbol is set based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. More specifically, in the case of a special symbol jackpot, whether the jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D or the jackpot D according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 Is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. The red LED and the blue LED are turned on. When the jackpot D is reached, the red LED, the blue LED, and the green LED are turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S211 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol display (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (S212). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S212: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S213), and the process proceeds to S220. Specifically, the setting performed in the process of S213 is setting an opening start command for outputting to the sound lamp control device 113, or the like. The opening start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of an effect mode to be executed during the jackpot opening period, and is set including information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won during the special variation period. That is, in the process of S213, when the special fluctuation counter 203g is larger than 0 (that is, when the current time is in the special fluctuation period), an opening start command corresponding to the big hit of the special fluctuation period is set, and the special fluctuation counter When 203g is 0 (that is, when the current period is not in the special fluctuation period), an opening start command corresponding to a normal jackpot is set. Based on this opening start command, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 opens the door in the pseudo-interval effect, and the effect that makes it appear as if the jackpot state has continued from the previous jackpot (see FIG. 18B) , Or a normal opening effect (for example, an effect of congratulating winning the jackpot).

  The opening start command set in the process of S213 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the opening start command, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the special variation period is a big hit from the opening start command, and performs display control of the display opening start command corresponding to the big hit state. The data is transmitted to the device 114 (see S1619 in FIG. 36). The display control device 114 that has received the display opening start command displays a normal opening (not shown) or an opening for a special variation period (see FIG. 19B) based on the display opening command (see FIG. 19B). (See S2420 in FIG. 43).

  On the other hand, in the process of S212, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the probability changing counter 203e is greater than 0 (S214). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S214: Yes), the value of the probability changing counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. On the other hand, if the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and the process proceeds to S216.

  In the subsequent processing of S216, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is greater than 0 (S216). The value of 203f is decremented by 1 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S218.

  In the process of S218, it is determined whether or not the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S218). If it is determined that the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S218: Yes), the special fluctuation is determined. The value of the middle counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 0 (S218: No), the process of S219 is skipped and the process proceeds to S220.

  In the process of S220 executed after the process of S213, S218, or S219, the lighting of the LED that is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S211 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set in order to synchronize the variable stop (S220).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is an execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 on the basis of the values of the various counters stored in.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the lottery result of the special symbol stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variation counter 203g in the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S302). The special variation counter 203g indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special variation state (that is, a state in which a variation pattern effect mode is selected from the special variation pattern selection table 202e when executing a variation pattern effect). If the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is greater than 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special fluctuation state of the special symbol. If the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is This indicates a normal state (that is, a state in which a variation pattern effect mode is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d when a variation pattern effect is executed).

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the special fluctuation counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), a normal fluctuation selection process is executed (S303). Here, the details of the normal variation selection process (S303) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the normal variation selection process (S303). The normal variation selection process is a process for determining a variation pattern effect mode to be executed from the variation pattern selection table 202d.

  In this normal variation selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result acquired in the process of S301 is a special symbol jackpot (S401). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hits (big wins) of the four types of special symbols are compared. A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) are determined for the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 16”, it is determined that the jackpot A (3R jackpot), and if it is in the range of “17 to 31”, the jackpot B It is determined that it is (4R jackpot), if it is in the range of “32 to 94”, it is determined that it is jackpot C (6R jackpot), and if it is in the range of “95 to 99”, it is jackpot D (15R jackpot) (See FIG. 8B).

  In the process of S401, if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S401: Yes), the display mode for the big win is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301. (S402). In the process of S402, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the hit hour selection table 202d2 (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B).

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. The variation patterns for jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D are “common normal reach”, “shared super reach”, “shared special reach”. Various “special reach” are defined as patterns.

  In the process of S401, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S401: No), the display mode of out is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. For example, as the stop type, “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than out of front / rear”, “complete out” and the like are defined.

  Next, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the deviation time selection table 202d1 (S405). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S403, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and fluctuations in symbol fluctuations such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the time. When the process of S403 or the process of S405 ends, this process is terminated and the process returns to the special symbol variation start process.

  Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the value of the special variation counter 203g is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), a special variation selection process is executed (S304). Here, the details of the special variation selection process (S304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special variation selection process (S304).

  In this special variation selection process, similarly to the normal variation selection process (S303), first, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S301 is a special symbol jackpot (S501). If it is determined that the jackpot is big (S501: Yes), the jackpot display mode is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S502). The specific contents are the same as the display mode setting (S402) at the big hit in the normal variation selection process (S303). Note that it may not be the same as the setting of the jackpot display mode (S402). For example, a table different from the first hit type selection table 202b used in the normal fluctuation selection process (S303) is prepared to change the jackpot. A mode may be set.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined based on the special selection table for winning hour 202e2 (see FIG. 10B) (S503), and this processing is terminated. As described above, the hit special selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 10B) is configured such that a variation pattern of a fixed variation period is selected according to the number of special symbol lotteries. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery performed for the first time after the end of the jackpot is successful, a variation pattern (special variation D) having a variation time of 8 seconds is selected. In addition, when a big hit is made for the second time after the jackpot ends, a variation pattern (special variation E) with a variation time of 6 seconds is selected. Is selected, and if a big hit is made for the fourth time after the jackpot is finished, a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation G) having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected. In addition, when the big hit is the fifth time after the big hit, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation A) is selected with a variation time of 2 seconds, and when the big hit is the sixth time after the big hit, the fluctuation time is 1. If a fluctuation pattern of 5 seconds (special fluctuation H) is selected and a big hit is made at the seventh time after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation pattern of one second (special fluctuation B) is selected and the eighth time after the end of the jackpot In the case of a big hit, a variation pattern (special variation C) having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected. With this configuration, the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the start of the next jackpot can be made constant regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries. Therefore, the effect period of the pseudo-interval effect and the effect period of the interval effect executed during the jackpot can be matched each time.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S501 that the special symbol is out (S501: No), the display mode of out is set (S504). The specific contents are the same as the display mode setting (S404) outside the normal variation selection process (S303). Note that it is not necessary to be the same as the setting of the display mode of out (S404). For example, a table different from the table for determining the stop type used in the normal variation selection process (S303) is prepared, May be set.

  Next, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the special selection table 202e1 for deviation (FIG. 10A) (S505), and this process is terminated. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. Note that, as described above, the special selection table for off-time 202e1 (see FIG. 10A) is configured such that a variation pattern of a fixed variation period is selected according to the number of special symbol lotteries. Specifically, if the special symbol lottery that is performed first or second after the end of the jackpot is missed, a variation pattern (special variation A) having a variation time of 2 seconds is selected. In addition, when the special symbol lottery performed for the third or fourth time after the end of the jackpot is missed, a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery performed 5th to 8th after the end of the jackpot is missed, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected. With this configuration, the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the end of the special variation period can be constant (8 seconds) regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries. Therefore, the effect period of the pseudo-interval effect and the effect period of the interval effect executed during the jackpot can be matched each time.

  Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. When the processing of S303 or S304 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S303 or S304 is set (S305). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S303 or S304 is set (S306). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1101 of the main processing (FIG. 31). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S306 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 21), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first entrance 64, and there is a start winning. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) at the first entrance 64 (S601). Here, the entrance to the first entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). . And it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than an upper limit (8 in this embodiment) (S603).

  And, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reservation number counter 203c is less than 8. If not (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is less than 8 (S603: Yes), the number of special symbol reservation balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S605, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is acquired (S606), and the pre-reading probability changing counter stored in the RAM 203 is acquired. The value of 203h is confirmed (S607).

  Here, when the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is larger than 0 (S607: Yes), whether the special symbol is a big hit or not is determined by the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S606 and the high probability time. The first random number table 202a2 (not shown) of the first 30 random number values (winning values) stored in the first random number table 202a2 are compared one by one (S608). As described above, as random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168" , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and If the random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  On the other hand, if the value of the prefetching probability changing counter 203h is 0 (S607: No), whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the low probability time. The first random number table 202a1 (not shown) is stored in the first random number table 202a1 (not shown). As described above, three random numbers "7, 107, 282" are set as the special symbol jackpot, and the first random number counter C1 value, Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  After determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit by the processing of S608 or S609, the big hit determination result determined in S608 or S609, the first hit type counter C2 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above, and the stop Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S610). In the process of S610, the value of the special symbol reservation ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reservation first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is set (S611). The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the jackpot determination result from the winning information command, and stores this information as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a, thereby determining the special variable extension display. Use for such as.

  After the winning information command is set by the processing of S611, it is determined whether the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is a special symbol jackpot (S612). If the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is a special symbol jackpot (S612: Yes), 12 is set in the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h (S613), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is out of the special symbol (S612: No), it is determined whether or not the prefetching accuracy changing counter 203h is greater than 0 (S614), and the prefetching accuracy is changing. If the counter 203h is larger than 0 (S614: Yes), the prefetching probability changing counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 0 (S614: No), the process of S615 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing the winning indication, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f of the RAM 203 is greater than 0 (S708). The hour / minute counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / hour state. If the hour / minute counter 203f is larger than 0 (S708: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is normal. It shows that the symbol is in the short state, and if the value of the hour / short counter 203f is 0 (S708: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit of the special symbol (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first inlet 64 is released. This is to prevent the balls that are going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 65a is not limited to the first winning opening even if the ball is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. A lot of balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A).

  In the processing of S708, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S708: No), the processing proceeds to S711. In the processing of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S707 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A).

  Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained by the processing of S710 or S711 is a normal symbol win (S712), and if it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S712: Yes) The display mode for hitting is set (S713). In the processing of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is greater than 0 (S714). If it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is greater than 0 (S714: Yes), the current present is the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit (S715). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol is not in a big hit (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S714, when the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S712: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is greater than 0 (S719), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is greater than 0 (S719: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is determined. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S719: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). The variation time here is a time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S722 (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the processing of S722 (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1108) of the main process (see FIG. 31) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S713 or S718.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S724). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S725), and this process is terminated. When the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S725, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1106) of the main process (see FIG. 31) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter 2 per 2.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball counter One is added to the value 203M of 203d (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S805), and this process is terminated. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004). If it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005). If not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1012. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1115 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), the information on occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1008). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1101 to S1108 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1111 and S1112 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 21) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the voice lamp control device receives the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) or the start winning process (see FIG. 26) or the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 26). 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32), the inter-round effect start command, the special game effect end command, and the special change end command set in the special change control process (see FIG. 33) are spoken. Transmit to the lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the end of the jackpot is set. This jackpot end setting includes the setting of the start of the special variable period. On the other hand, when closing the specific winning opening 65a in rounds other than the final round, an inter-round effect start command is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a special variation control process for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 that the variation pattern effect (special variation) in the special variation period has ended is executed (S1105). In the special variation control process, it is determined whether or not the special variation end timing is set after the end of the jackpot. If the special variation end timing is reached, a special variation end command is set. By setting this special variation end command, the special variation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) or special variation extended display (FIG. 20 (a)) is triggered by the end of the special variation executed last in the special variation period. )) Can be displayed. In this embodiment, the special variation control process (S1105) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1106). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1107). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S305 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display device 37. To do. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, the first symbol display update process is executed in the first symbol display device 37 when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S305 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) is completed. Is displayed, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the normal variation selection process (S303) or the special variation selection process (S304) of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23). Stop display (lighting display) on the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1108). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S721, the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 27), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27). (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1110). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1110: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the processes after S1101 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1110: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1111, S1112).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1111). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1102 (S1112).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1108 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1109, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 29 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1113 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1113), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1114). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1115), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1116), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1109 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1108, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1111 and S1112 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can start from S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S1001) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1101. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot or specific winnings This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being jackpoted (S1201). Specifically, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) S213 is executed, and if the special symbol jackpot start is set, the special symbol jackpot is started. During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1201, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1201: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1202 (S1202: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or a predetermined number of balls have been opened after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206), It is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning award (large opening) 65a of this time is the last round (that is, whether or not all of the jackpot rounds have ended) (S1207).

  When it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is for the final round (S1207: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1208), and values corresponding to the jackpot are set in various counters. It sets (S1209). That is, by setting 12 to the probability changing counter 203e, the special symbol is set in a high probability state from the end of the big hit until the special symbol is drawn 12 times. Further, by setting 8 in the hour / short counter 203f, the normal symbol is set in a high probability state (time reduction state) from the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery is executed eight times. Further, by setting 8 to the special fluctuation counter 203g, the special fluctuation period is set from the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery is executed eight times. After setting various counter values, this process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the round in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed is not the final round (S1207: No), an inter-round effect start command is set (S1210), and this process ends. This inter-round production start command is a command for starting an interval production (inter-round production) that is executed for 10 seconds from the end of the jackpot round to the start of the next round.

  Note that the inter-round effect command set by the process of S1210 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the inter-round effect command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display inter-round effect command to the display control device 114. When the display inter-round effect command is received by the display control device 114, the 3rd symbol display device 81 starts an interval effect (inter-round effect).

  Next, the special variation control process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special variation control process (S1105). This special variation control process (S1105) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and determines the end timing of the variation pattern effect (special variation) during the special variation period set after the end of the jackpot. This is a process for starting special variation end display (FIG. 19A) or special variation extended display (FIG. 20A), which is an effect at the end of the special variation period.

  First, in the special variation control process, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the special variation (S1301). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 selected in the special variation selection process (S304) has elapsed (S1301). The variation display variation time executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time of this special variation is determined. If it has elapsed (S1301: Yes), a special variation end command is set (S1302), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time of the special variation has not elapsed (that is, it is not the special variation period or the special variation end timing is not in the special variation period) (S1301: No), the process of S1302 is skipped. This process is terminated.

  The special variation end command set in the process of S1302 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special variation end command, it determines whether or not the special variation period has ended, and if it determines that the special variation period has ended, it displays the display special variation end command. 114. When a display special variation end command is received by the display control device 114, a special variation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) or a special variation extension display (FIG. 19), which is the effect at the end of the special variation, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 20 (a)) is started. Here, the special variation end command for display transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes a special variation end display (FIG. 19A) or a special variation extension display (FIG. 20A). Information indicating which to display is included.

  In the present embodiment, in the special variation control process (S1105), a special variation end command is output every time the variation pattern effect (special variation) executed in the special variation period after the end of the jackpot ends. A special variation end command may be set only at the end timing of the last variation pattern effect in the variation period. As a result, the process of outputting the special variation end command at the end of the special variation other than the special variation that is executed last in the special variation period can be omitted, so that the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 39, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process in S1516 (see FIG. 35) is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”). ) Is determined during execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1513 in FIG. 35), it executes a power-off process in S1516. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1516 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1402: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1516 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1516, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223. Therefore, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1402: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1517, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1404, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1404, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1406). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1516 is executed (see S1515 in FIG. 35). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1516 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1516 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1408 is reached after the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, through the processes of S1404 to S1406. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1411, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process of S1409 is that when the process from S1404 to S1406 is reached via the process of S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1501 was executed (S1501). If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1511 without performing the processes in S1502 to S1510. In S1501, it is determined whether 1 msec has passed or not, because S1502 to S1510 are mainly processes related to display (effects), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1511 and the variation display setting process of S1512 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1502). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1508 described later are set (S1503), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1504). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the processing of S1505, a customer waiting effect processing is executed, and then a hold number display update processing is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1507 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1509, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1510), and the process proceeds to S1511. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1509 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1511, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1512 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1513). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1513 (S1513: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1515), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1516). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1517), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1514), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1511). This command determination processing (S1511) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S 1511), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern from the main control device 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1601). If a variation pattern command has been received (S1601: Yes), a variation pattern command setting process for display for extracting and setting a variation pattern type from the variation pattern command is executed (S1602), and the process returns to the main processing.

  Here, the display variation pattern command setting process (S1602) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the display variation pattern command setting process (S1602).

  In the display variation pattern command setting process (S1602), first, the variation start flag 223c of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1701). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern is acquired from the received command (S1702), and it is determined whether or not the acquired fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation (S1703). If it is determined that the acquired variation pattern is not a special variation (S1703: No), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern table 222a of the ROM 222 (S1704). On the other hand, if the acquired variation pattern is a special variation (S1703: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the special variation pattern table 222b of the ROM 222 (S1705). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 39) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. If a variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1603). When the stop type command is received (S1603: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1604), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1605). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 39) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1603: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1606). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1606: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The fluctuation display hold count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1607). In the process of S1607, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1607 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number-of-holding balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the starting win is received. Is detected or each time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 by the process of S1607. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1607 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1606, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S1606: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1608). If a winning information command is received (S1608: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command and stored in the first area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1609). Return to processing. In the processing of S1609, the value of the special symbol reservation ball counter 223b is referred to. If the value is 0, the reservation first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of each counter C1 is acquired in the main controller 110, and the acquired counter C1 and the pre-reading probability change. A special symbol jackpot lottery is performed based on the value of the middle counter 203h, and the jackpot determination result is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. When the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is greater than 0, a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. When the prefetching probability changing counter 203h is 0, a special symbol for low probability Based on the jackpot random number table, the jackpot of special symbols is drawn. When the main controller 110 finishes prefetching, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result obtained by prefetching is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113. Note that the jackpot determination result of the special symbol obtained by prefetching is only a prediction, and may be provided separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery.

  On the other hand, if the winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1608 (S1608: No), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1610). When the round number command is received (S1610: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1611), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1612), the process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the round number command is not received in the processing of S1610 (S1610: No), it is then determined whether or not an inter-round effect start command is received from the main control device 110 (S1613). When the inter-round effect start command is received (S1613: Yes), the display inter-round effect start command for displaying the interval effect (inter-round effect) on the third symbol display device 81 is set ( S1614), the process is terminated. The display inter-round production start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the inter-round effect start command, the display control device 114 starts the interval effect (inter-round effect) in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1613, when the inter-round effect start command has not been received (S1613: No), it is determined whether the special game effect end command has been received (S1615). When a special game effect end command is received (S1615: Yes), a special game effect end command for display for starting a pseudo interval effect is set on the third symbol display device 81 (S1616). The process ends. The display special game effect end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display special game effect end command, the display control device 114 starts the pseudo interval effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1615, when the special game effect end command is not received (S1615: No), it is determined whether the special variation end command is received (S1617). If it is determined that a special variation end command has been received (S1617: Yes), display special variation end command setting processing is executed (S1618), and this processing ends.

  Here, the display special variation end command setting process (S1618) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the display special variation end command setting process (S1618). The display special variation end command processing is processing for setting a display special variation end command for causing the display control device 114 to execute the end effect of the pseudo-interval effect based on the end of the special variation period. is there.

  In the display special variation end command setting process (S1618), it is first determined whether it is the end timing of the special variation period (S1801). Specifically, whether or not it is the end timing of the special variation period is determined by whether or not the special variation has been executed a predetermined number of times (8 times in the present embodiment). The number of executions of the special variation may be configured to be received from the main control device 110 by being included in the special variation end command, or determined based on whether a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the jackpot. You may do.

  In the process of S1801, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the special variation period (S1801: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the special variation period (S1801: Yes), the winning information of the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 is acquired (S1802), and the big hit It is determined whether there is winning information to be shown (S1803).

  In the processing of S1803, when it is determined that there is winning information indicating a jackpot (S1803: Yes), the special variation extension display (FIG. 20A) is set as the display mode of the special variation end (S1804), The process proceeds to S1806. The special variation extension display set here is based on the winning information acquired in the processing of S1802, and the special variation extension display ends in accordance with a predetermined stop display that is a big hit. Specifically, when the winning information of the first, second and fourth areas is out and the winning information of the third area is a big win, for example, the fluctuation time of the outage is 10 seconds and the fluctuation time of the big hit is 15 seconds. In this way, the variation time is uniquely determined based on the jackpot determination result, and the special variation extension display may be completed in 35 seconds when the predetermined stop display that is a jackpot is displayed, or it is a jackpot The special variation extension display may be continuously displayed until a variation pattern command for displaying a predetermined stop display is received.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1803 that there is no winning information indicating a big hit (S1803: No), the special variation end display (FIG. 19A) is set as the display mode of the special variation end (S1805). ), The process proceeds to S1806. The special variation end display is an effect that is fixed for 2 seconds. As shown in FIG. 19A, after the effect that the boy cannot open the door and starts to cry, As shown in b), a woman appears on the third symbol display device 81, and an effect is displayed in which the characters “See you!” are displayed. By making the special variation end display an effect of 2 seconds, the period until the pseudo interval effect is ended can be 10 seconds (special variation period 8 seconds + special variation end display 2 seconds). It can be combined with the interval production period.

  Note that the special variation end display is not necessarily limited to the effect of 2 seconds, and is based on the winning information acquired in the process of S1802 and is stopped and displayed last in the variation corresponding to the first to fourth areas. The special variation end display may end in accordance with the area stop display. Specifically, when the winning information in the first to fourth areas is out of place, for example, the out-of-range variation time is determined uniquely by the jackpot determination result such as 10 seconds. The special variation end display may be finished in 40 seconds when the stop display is displayed last, or until the last time the variation pattern command for displaying the stop display, that is, the variation pattern command after four times is received. The special change end display may be continuously displayed.

  In the process of S1806, the display mode of the special fluctuation end set in the process of S1804 or S1805 is set as a display special fluctuation end command (S1806), the process is terminated and the command determination process (see FIG. 36). Return to). The display special variation end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display special variation end command, the display control device 114 starts the special variation end display (FIG. 19A) or the special variation extension display (FIG. 20A) on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. In the process of S1617, when the special variation end start command has not been received (S1617: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1619), the process returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set so as to be transmitted. Specific examples of other commands include the opening start command described above. In the process of S1619, the command is executed so that information indicating whether or not the jackpot during the special variation period is extracted from the opening start command, and a display opening start command corresponding to the extracted information is transmitted to the display control device 114. Set up.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1512). This variable display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1906. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then the display variation pattern command setting process of the command determination process (see FIG. 35). In (S1602), the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1906.

  In the processing of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907), and then in the process of S1605 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1910.

  In the process of S1909, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910). This process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing in S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 40). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 40) (S2105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2001) is executed, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 41, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is canceled. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process ends, an initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 51A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 51A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thereby, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B), a simple command determination process is performed so that a simple power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) is drawn. (See S2308 in FIG. 42B) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 42B).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main control device 110 instructs the start of the variation effect by controlling the sound lamp. When the display 113 is used, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a simple variation image at power-on can be displayed immediately during the variation rendering period, and a simple variation rendering can be performed. . Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42B, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 17) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 42B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that a normal effect image is displayed instead of a simple power-on image. In order to display on the three-symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, the process corresponding to the command is executed, the display demo command, When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a back image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the back image after change is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction for transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 17 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (a jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, display at other times off) is displayed. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display a simple power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2304. To do.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47, the details of the above-described command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 43, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44A, details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described. FIG. 44A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 44A), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the data table storage area. The data is read from 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Of the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2501 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2503, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2505 is updated, while the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501 is updated. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2504, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (displayed when jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, and other missed) indicated by the display stop class command is determined (S2601). The change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is compared between the stop type table and the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) is executed. A stop symbol after production is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S2603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 43).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the task process (S2304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). If there is a display round number command (S2408: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S2701). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2702).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2701, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2705), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2408 that there is no display round number command (S2408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an inter-display round production start command among the unprocessed commands (S2410). ) If there is an inter-round effect start command (S2410: Yes), the inter-round effect start command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 45B, details of the inter-round effect start command processing (S2411) will be described. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing an inter-round effect start command process. This inter-round effect start command process is a process for displaying an interval effect (inter-round effect) on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display inter-round effect start command received from the audio lamp control device 114. .

  In the inter-round effect start command processing, first, an inter-round display data table corresponding to the display mode of the interval effect (inter-round effect) indicated by the display inter-round effect start command is determined, and the determined inter-round display data table Are read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2802). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each inter-round display data table corresponding to the display mode of each inter-round effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the inter-round display data table set by the processing of S2801 is turned on. At the same time, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the other display data table between rounds is set to OFF (S2803). In the display setting process, the inter-round display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of the inter-round effect by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2803. It can be easily determined whether or not there is.

  Next, based on the inter-round display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2804), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2805). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2806), the inter-round effect start command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2410 that there is no inter-display round production start command (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display special game production end command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display special game effect end command (S2412: Yes), a special game effect end command process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 46A, details of the special game effect end command processing (S2413) will be described. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing special game effect end command processing. This special game effect end command process is a process for displaying the pseudo interval effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display special game effect end command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the special game effect end command processing, first, a special game effect end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the special variation executed at the end of the special game effect indicated by the display special game effect end command is determined, and the determined special game effect end command data is determined. The game effect end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2902). Of the data table determination flags provided for each special game effect end data table corresponding to the display mode of the special variation executed at the end of each special game effect, the special game effect end display data table set by the process of S2901. The data table discrimination flag corresponding to is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the other special game effect end display data table is set to off (S2903). In the display setting process, the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d refers to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2903, and the display mode of which special game effect end effect is displayed. It is possible to easily determine whether it corresponds.

  Next, based on the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2905). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2906), the special game effect end command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2412 that there is no display special game effect end command (S2412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display special variation end command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a special change end command for display (S2414: Yes), the special change end command process is executed (S2415), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the special variation end command processing (S2415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing special variation end command processing. In this special variation end command processing, a special variation end display (FIG. 19 (a)) or a special variation extended display (FIG. 20 (a)) corresponding to the display special variation end command received from the sound lamp control device 114 is displayed. This is a process for displaying at the end of special variation.

  In the special variation end command processing, first, the special variation end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the special variation end display or extended display to be executed at the end of the special variation indicated by the display special variation end command is determined. The determined special variation end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3002). Of the data table determination flags provided for each special variation end data table corresponding to the display mode of each special variation end display or extended display, the special game effect end display data table set by the processing of S3001. The corresponding data table determination flag is turned on, and the data table determination flag corresponding to the other special game effect end display data table is set to OFF (S3003). In the display setting process, the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d refers to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3003, and the display mode of which special game effect end effect is displayed. It is possible to easily determine whether it corresponds.

  Next, based on the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3005). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3006), the special variation end command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2414 that there is no display special change end command (S2414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2416). If there is a rear image change command (S2416: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2417), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 47A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2417) will be described. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3603) of the back image change accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on (S3101). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3102), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52), when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3101 is turned on, the back surface after the change is determined from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3102. Specify the image type. If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set in S3102, The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type (resident) that stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the RAM address.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S3102, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2416 that there is no rear image change command (S2416: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2418). If this is the case (S2418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2419), and processing returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 47B, details of the error command processing (S2419) will be described. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process (see FIG. 47B), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3202). The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3202 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3202, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2418 that there is no error command (S2418: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2420), and the processing returns to S2201. In addition, as a process (S2420) with respect to another unprocessed command, the process at the time of receiving the display opening start command mentioned above is mentioned, for example. Specifically, in the process of S2420, if it is determined that a display opening start command has been received, a normal opening mode (for example, congratulates that a new jackpot has been won). Display the opening effect in the mode), and process to display the opening effect in a mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 19 (b)) as if the jackpot continues during the special variation period It is.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processing of S2402 to S2420 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2402 to S2420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying a simple power-on image from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command Only the variable pattern command process (see FIG. 44 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 44 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other commands are also extracted. Performs a process of discarding without executing a process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 44A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48 to FIG. 50, details of the above-described display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 48, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3301). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No). In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the process of S3302 to S3304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the new command flag is set to off (S3302), and then S3303 to S3304. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3304).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3401).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3304) or in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3303: No), the process proceeds to S3305.

  In S3305, pointer update processing is executed (S3305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3501). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3502). As a result, if it is End information (S3502: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3503). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3505), and this processing is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3506, the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3502: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3306 together with the previously developed warning image and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). If the value of the time counter 233h is greater than 0 (S3308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3308: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3309).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3309: Yes), the confirmation display effect has not yet been produced and the decision display effect has been performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3310), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3311). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3315, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off in the processing of S3309 (S3309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3316). If the demo display flag is off (S3316: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3317), and then the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3318). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thus, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set.

  In the process of S3316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3316: No), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is ended, and the demonstration effect is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B), the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on. However, in the simple display setting process, a simple power-on variation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. A process of setting a display data table that stipulates to stop displaying the image in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3601, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a resident image transfer setting process (S3602), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3701), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3701: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has been completed (S3702). In the process of S3702, when an image data transfer instruction is issued to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S3702 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3702: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to S3703. Also, as a result of the process of S3701, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the process proceeds to S3703.

  In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3703). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S3703 (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 42B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 42B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 43 to 47) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) (see S3601: No in FIG. 51A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S3603), which is a process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3305) of the display setting process (S2303) executed previously is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802), and if it is transfer data information (S3802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3803, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3804), and the process proceeds to step S3805.

  In the process of S3802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3802: No), the processes of S3803 and S3804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3806).

  In the process of S3806, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to S3807. Also, as a result of the process of S3805, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3805: No), the process proceeds to S3807.

  In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807). If the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S3803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3807: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3809). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3809: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3812), and the process proceeds to S3813.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3813, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The determination in the process of S3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3813 (S3813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3813 (S3813: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3814). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, when the normal image transfer process is executed, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the back image is displayed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information required for drawing each sprite) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 17 is generated (S3901). That is, in the process of S3901, the type of storage RAM storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 42B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to perform a pseudo-interval effect after the end of the jackpot. This pseudo-interval effect starts with a special variation period (from the end of the jackpot until the end of the eight variation pattern effects, or the special symbol lottery is performed eight times after the jackpot ends. This is an effect that is executed during the period until the game is performed, and the same effect as the interval effect that is executed during each jackpot round is performed.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the big win is won by the time the special symbol lottery is performed 8 times after the big win is ended, even if it is a big win at any number of times from the first to the eighth. The period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the next jackpot is 10 seconds. In this 10 seconds, a pseudo-interval effect is executed, and it is suggested that the jackpot will continue. On the other hand, the interval effect executed during the jackpot is also fixed for 10 seconds, and it is suggested that the jackpot will continue and the next round will start during the 10-second effect. That is, the pseudo-interval effect and the hit effect during the jackpot are configured so that the effect period and the effect content are the same. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect and the pseudo-interval effect, so if the player suggests a continuation of the jackpot, the player has won the jackpot with a large number of rounds, or the jackpot ends once However, as a result of winning the jackpot again before the special symbol lottery is performed eight times, it is difficult to distinguish whether the jackpot has continued for a long time. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to know how long the jackpot round will continue, it is possible to play a game while having a sense of expectation that the jackpot will last for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game that is a big hit of the player.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, pre-reading is performed at the end of the special variation period, and it is determined whether or not a lottery result that is a big hit exists in the four special symbol lotteries after the end of the special variation. ing. And when it determines with the lottery result used as a jackpot being put on hold, it is comprised so that a pseudo-interval effect may be extended to the jackpot. As a result, even if an effect suggesting the end of the jackpot in the pseudo-interval effect (ie, an effect that the boy begins to cry as shown in FIG. 19A) is displayed, the pseudo-interval period is extended for the player. I can expect that. Therefore, the interest for the player's play can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) is configured so that the special variation period is always 8 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the special variation period is 10 seconds and the jackpot is reached during the special fluctuation, the opening period is omitted, so that the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the next jackpot is 10 You may make it become second.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to make the execution period of the interval effect coincide with the execution period of the pseudo interval effect, the change pattern effect of the change time determined according to the value of the special changing counter 203g is executed. However, the control method for making the execution period of the pseudo-interval effect coincide with the execution period of the interval effect is not limited to this. For example, a timer that can measure the time elapsed since the end of the jackpot is provided, and when the variation pattern effect mode is selected, the variation period may be set based on the elapsed time. Specifically, for example, when selecting a variation pattern mode with 5 seconds remaining in the special variation period, a variation time of 5 seconds or less (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds) or a variation of 5 seconds What is necessary is just to comprise so that either of time may be selected.

  Further, the interval effect period and the pseudo-interval effect period are not limited to 10 seconds, and can be arbitrarily determined, for example, 5 seconds or 15 seconds. Moreover, you may comprise so that the period of the interval production in jackpot may be set at random every time. Thereby, since it is not necessary to set the production period of the pseudo-interval effect as a fixed period, a table for selecting the variation pattern effect during the special variation period can be made common, for example, with the normal time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the special variation period ends (8 seconds from the end of the jackpot) and the timing at which the special symbol variation ends are matched, but the timing does not necessarily have to be matched. For example, the special variation period may be set as a fixed period (for example, 8 seconds), and the variation pattern effect may be selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d regardless of the fixed period (for example, 8 seconds). That is, even during the variation pattern effect, the special variation period may be terminated when a fixed period (for example, 8 seconds) elapses. With this configuration, the data table for selecting the variation pattern effect mode can be shared with the normal time, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. In addition, by setting the special variation period to a fixed period (for example, 8 seconds), it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the big hit interval effect and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, it is not possible to know how long the jackpot will last, and the player can have a sense of expectation that the jackpot will continue for a long time. In this case, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit during the special fluctuation period, and if the production period of the fluctuation pattern effect for notifying the big hit exceeds the special fluctuation period, it will be a big hit You may comprise so that a pseudo-interval effect may be extended. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot has once ended, so that it can be felt as if the jackpot has continued for a long time. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the big hit is not made in the special change period, the change pattern effect mode is selected from the special selection table 202e1 for losing (see FIG. 10A), and in the special change period. In the case of a big hit, the variation pattern effect mode is selected from the special selection table for winning hour 202e2 (see FIG. 10B), but the variation pattern mode is selected from the common table. You may comprise so that. For example, the variation pattern effect may be selected from the special selection table for off-time 202e1 (see FIG. 10A) regardless of the special symbol lottery result. By configuring in this way, the hit special selection table 202e2 can be omitted, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. Further, the special selection table 202e1 for detachment is configured such that a variation pattern effect with a short variation period is selected as the number of special symbol lotteries increases. As a result, since a relatively long variation pattern effect is executed in the first 4 seconds of the special variation period, the special symbol lottery is performed only twice, whereas in the latter 4 seconds, a relatively short variation is performed. Since the pattern effect is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed six times. In other words, since the number of special symbol lotteries increases in the second half of the special variation period, a big hit is likely to occur in the second half of the special variation period when the big win occurs during the special variation period. Therefore, even if the variation pattern effect mode is selected from the special selection table 202e1 for off-time (see FIG. 10A) regardless of the special symbol lottery result in the special variation period, In this case, the possibility of hitting in the latter half of the special variable period can be increased. Therefore, even if it is a win, it can be difficult to determine whether or not it is a pseudo-interval effect from the length of the special variation period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of the look-ahead performed at the end of the special variation period, when the big win is made until four special symbols are drawn, the pseudo-interval effect is configured to be extended. Even when there is no reserved ball that is a big hit at the end of the special variation period, the pseudo-interval effect may be extended with a predetermined probability. Thereby, since it is not determined that it becomes a big hit after the end of the pseudo-interval effect only by extending the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to allow the player to report the result of the extended pseudo-interval effect to the end.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60. In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, it comprised so that the fluctuation pattern effect of a fixed fluctuation period might be selected for every special symbol lottery number of times in a special fluctuation period. Thus, the special variation period is configured to end in 8 seconds from the end of the jackpot regardless of whether or not the jackpot is a big hit in the special change period. In other words, in the first embodiment, it is assumed that the variation pattern effect is executed without interval.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, even if it is in the middle of the special variation period, if a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed, the main control device 110 gives a pseudo interval effect to the sound lamp control device 113. It is configured to notify that it is the end timing. In other words, even if the start condition is not satisfied and the number of reserved balls is zero (no change state) during the special variation period, the execution period of the pseudo interval effect can be matched with the interval effect. It is configured as follows. Thereby, since the eight fluctuation pattern effects are not executed, it is possible to prevent the pseudo-interval effects from continuing endlessly.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it is detected that there is no change during the special change period and the player has stopped the game, the predetermined time (8 seconds) has not elapsed. Even so, the end of the pseudo-interval effect is configured to be notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. This allows the player to recognize that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the ball next wins the first entrance 64 before the special variation period ends. Therefore, for example, a player who has stopped the game can be launched for a reason such as concentrating on the effect of whether or not the jackpot continues, so that the game is stopped. The state can be shortened.

  Also, if the jackpot continues for a long time, the player may lose if he / she does not continue playing the jackpot without taking a break. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) are awarded to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Even if not, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed and the opportunity to win a prize ball is missed. In the present embodiment, since it is possible to know at an earlier stage that there is no possibility of being a big hit unless the player strikes a ball, the player can easily take a break. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute a sharp game.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 203 is changed in the main controller 110 and the timer executed by the MPU 201 The partial process included in the interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the partial process included in the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 is This is a point different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the first embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, the RAM 203 built in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 54, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with a time counter 203j, a stop period counter 203k, and a special fluctuation flag 203l. .

  The time counter 203j is a down counter used to determine whether or not 8 seconds have elapsed since the end of the jackpot. The clock counter 203j is set with a counter value corresponding to 8 seconds at the end of the jackpot control process 2 (see S1221 in FIG. 59), and the main process (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment is executed. Each time, it is decremented by 1 in the special variation control process 2 (see S1311 in FIG. 60).

  The stop period counter 203k is a down counter that determines the length of a period during which the player stops the game in a special variation period that is set after the jackpot ends. Based on the value of the stop period counter 203k, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-interval effect is ended earlier than usual. The stop period counter 203k is set with a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds at the end of the jackpot control process 2 (see S1221 in FIG. 59). Also, when the operation of the handle 51 by the player is detected during the special variation period (that is, when it is determined that the touch sensor 51a is turned on), the counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is reset. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not changing during the special change period, the holding ball is 0, and the handle 51 is not operated by the player, the timer allocation in the second embodiment is performed. Each time the insertion process (see FIG. 55) is executed, one is subtracted in the period shortening process (see S4004 in FIG. 57).

  The special change flag 203l is a flag indicating whether or not a special change period is in effect. If the state is on, the special change flag 203l indicates that the special change period is in progress. After the end of the variable period). This special fluctuation flag 203l is set to ON at the end of the jackpot (see S1222 in FIG. 59). On the other hand, when a special variation end command output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 is set, the special variation flag 203l is set to OFF (see S4007 in FIG. 57 and S1313 in FIG. 60). If the special symbol jackpot is won, it is set off before the jackpot is started (see S232 in FIG. 56).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 54 to 60. First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. This timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds as described above.

  Among the timer interrupt processes, the processes of S101 to S103 and S105 to S109 are the same as the processes of S101 to S103 and S105 to S109 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed. In the timer interrupt process in the second embodiment, a special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (S104) in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the above-described special symbol variation process 2 (S111) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S111). This special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is similar to the special symbol variation process (S104) in the first embodiment, and the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol is displayed. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed on the display device 81.

Among the special symbol variation process 2 (S111), in each process of S201 to S220, the same process as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed.
In the special symbol variation process 2 in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the period shortening process is then performed. Is executed (S231), and this process is terminated. This period shortening process (S231) is a process for shortening and ending the pseudo-interval effect according to the operation state of the handle 51 in the special variation period.

  Furthermore, in the special symbol variation process 2 in the second embodiment, when the start of jackpot is set by the process of S213, the special variation flag 203l is then set to OFF (S232), and the process proceeds to S220. By turning off the special variation flag 203l once before the big hit is started, it is possible to prevent an effect or control during the special change period from being erroneously executed during the big win.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the period shortening process executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 56) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this period shortening process. As described above, the period shortening process is a process for shortening and terminating the pseudo-interval effect according to the operation state of the handle 51 in the special variation period.

  In the period shortening process, first, by determining whether or not the value of the time counter 203j is greater than 0, it is determined whether it is within 8 seconds from the end of the jackpot (S4001). If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203j is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S4001: No), it is after the end of the pseudo interval effect has already been notified to the audio lamp control device 113. This means that the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4001, if it is determined that the value of the time counter 203j is greater than 0, it is then determined whether or not the player is operating the handle 51 based on the detection result of the touch sensor 51a ( S4002). In the process of S4002, when it is determined that the player is operating the handle 51 (S4002: Yes), a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set as the value of the stop period counter 203k (S4003), and this process Exit. The stop period counter 203k is decremented by 1 every 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55). Therefore, the counter value corresponding to 2 seconds (that is, 2000 ms) is 1000.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4002 that the player has not operated the handle 51 (S4002: No), the value of the stop period counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S4004), and the stop period counter 203k after the subtraction is updated. It is determined whether or not the value is 0 (S4005). When it is determined that the value of the stop period counter 203k is not 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) (S4005: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4005 that the value of the stop period counter is 0 (S4005: Yes), the player has not operated the handle 51 for 2 seconds (that is, the player has In order to shorten the pseudo-interval effect and end it, a special variation end command is set (S4006), and the special variation flag 203l is set to OFF (S4007). ), This process is terminated.

  By shortening the pseudo-interval effect and ending it, the player recognizes that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the ball next wins the first entrance 64 before the special variable period ends. Can be made. Therefore, for example, a player who has stopped the game can be launched for a reason such as concentrating on the effect of whether or not the jackpot continues, so that the game is stopped. The state can be shortened.

  Also, if the jackpot continues for a long time, the player may lose if he / she does not continue playing the jackpot without taking a break. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) are awarded to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Even if not, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed and the opportunity to win a prize ball is missed. In the present embodiment, since it is possible to know at an earlier stage that there is no possibility of being a big hit unless the player strikes a ball, the player can easily take a break. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute a sharp game.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main process. This main process is a process for executing the main control of the game at a cycle of 4 ms as described above.

  Of these main processes (see FIG. 58), in the processes of S1101 to S1103 and S1106 to S1116, the processes of S1101 to S1103 and S1106 to S1116 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed. In the main process in the second embodiment, instead of the jackpot control process (S1104) in the first embodiment, the jackpot control process 2 (S1121) is executed. Further, in place of the special variation control process (S1105), Special fluctuation control process 2 (S1122) is executed. Details of these processes will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60 that follow.

  First, the jackpot control process 2 described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2. This jackpot control process 2 is similar to the jackpot control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 32), and sets the opening / closing of the special winning opening (big opening) 65a during the jackpot or starts a new round. This is a process of setting a round number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113.

  Of the jackpot control process 2, the same processes as S1201 to S1210 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment are executed in the processes of S1201 to S1210. In the jackpot control process 2 in the second embodiment, the end of jackpot is set (S1208), and 12, 8, and 8 are set in the probability changing counter 203e, the time-shortening counter 203f, and the special changing counter 203g, respectively ( Next, a counter value corresponding to 8 seconds is set in the time counter 203j, and a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the stop period counter 203k (S1221). Here, the time counter 203j is a counter that is decremented by 1 every time the main process (see FIG. 58) (ie, every 4 ms), the counter value corresponding to 8 seconds (ie, 8000 ms) is 2000. . Further, as described above, the stop period counter 203k is a counter that is decremented by 1 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55) executed every 2 ms, so that the counter corresponding to 2 seconds (that is, 2000 ms). The value is 1000. When the setting of each counter is completed by the process of S1221, the special variation flag is set to ON (S1222), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special fluctuation control process 2 (S1122) executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special variation control process 2. The special variation control process 2 determines whether or not it is time to end the pseudo interval effect based on the value of the time counter 203j. If it is the end timing, a special variation end command for ending the pseudo interval effect is determined. Is a process for setting.

  In this special variation control process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the special variation flag 2031 is on (S1311). If it is determined that the special variation flag 2031 is off (S1311), it is already determined. This means that it is after the end of the pseudo-interval effect is set, so this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1311 that the special variation flag 203l is on (S1311: Yes), then the value of the time counter 203j is decremented by 1 (S1312).

  When the processing of S1312 ends, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time counter 203j after subtraction is 0 (S1313), and if it is determined that it is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1313: No) ), It means that the timing for setting the end of the pseudo-interval effect has not been reached (that is, within 8 seconds from the end of the jackpot), so this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time counter b203j is 0 (S1313: Yes), it means that it is time to set the end of the pseudo-interval effect (that is, 8 seconds have passed since the end of the jackpot). Therefore, a special variation end command is set (S1302), the special variation flag 203l is set to OFF (S1314), and this processing ends. In this way, when the special variation end command is set when 8 seconds have elapsed from the end of the jackpot, the start condition is not satisfied and the number of reserved balls is zero during the special variation period. Even if the state (no change state) is reached, the execution period of the pseudo-interval effect can be matched with the interval effect. Therefore, since the eight fluctuation pattern effects are not executed, it is possible to prevent the pseudo-interval effect from continuing endlessly. Note that the special variation end command set by the processing of S1302 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 201. Among them, it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the special variation end command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the display special variation end command to the display control device 114. When the display special variation end command is received by the display control device 114, an effect of ending the pseudo-interval effect is executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the time counter 203j is configured to be able to count the elapsed time since the jackpot has ended. Here, when the variation pattern effect is executed without special intervals during the special variation, the special variation period ends 8 seconds after the jackpot ends, and the pseudo-interval effect can be terminated. Is not satisfied, and the number of reserved balls becomes zero (no change state), the end condition of the special change period is not satisfied, so there is a possibility that the pseudo-interval effect will continue endlessly. It was.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if it is in the middle of the special fluctuation period, if it is determined that a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed based on the count value of the time counter 203j, the pseudo interval effect is ended. Configured to set. By configuring in this way, the end of the pseudo interval effect is set even if the starting condition is not satisfied and the number of reserved balls is zero (no change state) during the special fluctuation period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the end of the special variation period and prevent the pseudo-interval effect from continuing endlessly.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it is detected that there is no change during the special change period and the player has stopped the game, the predetermined time (8 seconds) has not elapsed. Even so, the end of the pseudo-interval effect is configured to be notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. This allows the player to recognize that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the ball next wins the first entrance 64 before the special variation period ends. Therefore, for example, a player who has stopped the game can be launched for a reason such as concentrating on the effect of whether or not the jackpot continues, so that the game is stopped. The state can be shortened.

  Also, if the jackpot continues for a long time, the player may lose if he / she does not continue playing the jackpot without taking a break. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) are awarded to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Even if not, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed and the opportunity to win a prize ball is missed. In the present embodiment, since it is possible to know at an earlier stage that there is no possibility of being a big hit unless the player strikes a ball, the player can easily take a break. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute a sharp game.

  In the present embodiment, the elapsed time from the end of the jackpot is configured to be counted by the time counter 203j provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a counter means is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 so that the elapsed time is measured by the sound lamp control device 113, and when it is determined that a predetermined period (8 seconds) has elapsed, a pseudo interval effect is produced. You may comprise so that it may complete | finish. As a result, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, so that a process having a high degree of importance in a game, such as a process of executing a special symbol lottery, can be reliably executed. In this case, the variation pattern effect during the special variation period may be selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d as in the normal case. Further, when a variation pattern command indicating a big hit is output from the main control device 110 before the predetermined period elapses, the sound lamp control device 113 causes the pseudo-interval production until at least that big variation variation effect is finished. May be configured to be extended. Thereby, the special variation pattern selection table 202e can be omitted, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  The present embodiment is configured to set the end display of the pseudo-interval effect when the start condition is not satisfied and the number of reserved balls is zero (no change state) during the special change period. However, it is also possible to display effects of completely different systems. For example, an effect that encourages the player to take a break may be executed. Further, for example, a display for prompting the player to operate the handle 51 may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before the pseudo interval effect is shortened and ended. The display for prompting the operation is, for example, a display that suggests that the pseudo-interval effect is ended if no operation is performed. Thereby, when the player wants to thoroughly enjoy the production and has stopped the operation, the production can be confirmed to the end by resuming the operation. Also, if the player has continued to play without taking a break due to a long consecutive success of the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect, etc. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the pseudo-interval effect is configured to be terminated when the start condition is not satisfied and the state in which the number of reserved balls is zero (no change state) continues for 2 seconds in the special variation period. However, the condition for terminating the production is not limited to this, and may be a period longer than 2 seconds or a short period. In addition, pre-reading is performed at the end of the jackpot, and if there is no lottery result that is a big hit in the holding ball (or if the number of held balls is 0), the end display is displayed at the end of the jackpot (or a break is given to the player) It may be configured to perform an effect in a mode that promotes the user. By configuring in this way, the jackpot round is completed, and it is possible to make the player take a good break at the timing when one paragraph is attached.

  In addition, if the starting condition is not satisfied during the special fluctuation period or at the end of the jackpot and the number of reserved balls is zero (no change), the end display (or the player will It may be configured such that the player can select whether or not to perform an effect in a mode that encourages a break. For example, when a predetermined operation such as operating the frame button 22 is performed during the jackpot, it may be configured such that an effect or the like that encourages the player to take a break can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who has just taken a sufficient break from displaying an effect or the like for prompting a break again at a short time interval and causing the player to feel bothered.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the end of the pseudo-interval effect is set when 8 seconds at the maximum has elapsed since the end of the jackpot, but even if the pseudo-interval effect is ended, a predetermined number of times (8 times) Until the variation pattern effect is executed, the variation pattern effect mode (variation time) is selected from the special variation pattern selection table 202e. In this case, it may be configured such that an effect different from the normal time is executed until the variation pattern effect of 8 times (or 12 times when the high probability state of the special symbol ends) ends. An effect different from the normal time is, for example, an effect of searching for a door different from the door that could not be opened in the pseudo-interval effect. Further, while the effect different from the normal time is being executed, the variation pattern effect may be reduced and displayed on the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 as in the pseudo-interval effect. Good. By configuring in this way, it is shorter than a normal time such as 1 second or 0.5 seconds (that is, a state in which a variation pattern effect of a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d). It can be suppressed that the variation pattern effect is continuously executed by the entire third symbol display device 81 and the player feels uncomfortable. In addition, the player can recognize that the jackpot has once ended, but the player can expect to win the jackpot again (that is, the high probability state of the special symbol).

  In the present embodiment, the time counter 203j is updated in the special variation control process 2 (S1122) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed every 4 ms, but is executed every 2 ms. The timer interruption process (see FIG. 55) may be performed. Thereby, the time counter 203j can be updated with a finer time width.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the stop period counter 203k is configured to be updated in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55), but is configured to be performed in the main process (see FIG. 58). May be. The value of the stop period counter 203k is used to determine whether or not the pseudo-interval effect is to be shortened and ended. Even if the determination to shorten and end the pseudo-interval effect is delayed by several ms, the normal pseudo-interval This is because the production only continues and no disadvantages arise.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65 a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64. Thus, in each of the big hits, the player hits the ball in an attempt to make the specific winning opening 65a win the ball, so that the ball easily enters the first incoming slot 64 during the big hit. This makes it easy to increase the number of reserved balls during the jackpot, making it difficult to generate a situation where the number of held balls does not exist and no change is made during the special fluctuation period set after the end of the jackpot. That is, the end condition of the special variation period is not satisfied, and it is difficult for the pseudo-interval effect to continue endlessly.

  In contrast, in the third embodiment, two types of entrances (first entrance 64 and second entrance 640) are provided, and one entrance (second entrance 640) is provided. Are provided directly above the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Further, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is configured to be easily opened during the big hit. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to hit the ball that was launched during the jackpot to the second entrance 640, so there is no number of balls held in the special variation period set after the jackpot ends. , It is possible to make it more difficult to generate a situation in which no fluctuation occurs.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the second entrance 640 and the electric motor accompanying the second entrance 640 in the game board 13. In the main controller 110, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b of the ROM 202 are partially changed, the state setting table 202f is newly added, the RAM 203 Are provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a1, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2, and a state transition counter 203m, and The partial processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 31) is the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Is a point that is different. Other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the first embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted. In the following, the special symbol lottery performed based on the entry into the first entrance 64 will be referred to as the special symbol 1 (Special Fig. 1) lottery (Special Fig. 1), and the second entrance The special symbol lottery performed on the basis of having entered 640 is referred to as a special symbol 2 (special symbol 2) lottery.

  First, with reference to FIG. 61, the game board 13 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an outline of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 13 of the third embodiment, a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in the lower right portion of the front view. A second entrance 640 is provided directly above the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a, and the electric accessory 640a rotates around the direction perpendicular to the game board 13 as a normal symbol. The ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second entrance.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the second winning hole 640 is provided directly above the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. ) A ball launched with aiming at 65a can easily enter the second entrance 640. In addition, during the jackpot, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is configured to be easily opened, so that the number of retained balls is likely to be maximum (four) at the end of the jackpot.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. FIG. 62A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62A, the ROM 202 of this embodiment defines a state setting table 202f in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment. The state setting table 202f is a data table that is referred to for setting a state after the end of the jackpot. Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the setting after the jackpot is different depending on the jackpot type. In the state setting table 202f, setting values are defined in association with the states to be set.

  FIG. 62B is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the RAM 203 of this embodiment has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a1 instead of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a provided in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment, and A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is provided. Each of these has one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first area to holding fourth area).

  In the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a1, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. , An area in which each value is stored. On the other hand, in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640 are stored. This is an area where each value is stored.

  In addition, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment replaces the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c provided in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment with a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 and a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2. Is provided. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 is a variable symbol display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 on the basis of the entrance to the first entrance 64 (start winning prize). This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 enters (starts) the second entrance 640 The number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the special symbol (first symbol) variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on (winning) up to four times It is a counter for counting.

  Further, the RAM 203 of this embodiment is provided with a state transition counter 203m instead of the hour / medium counter 203f provided in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment. The state transition counter 203m is a counter that indicates whether or not the normal symbol is in a low probability state. If the value of the state transition counter 203m is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol low probability state. It shows that there is. On the other hand, if the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol high probability state (time-short state). Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the normal symbol is set to a high probability state of a normal symbol and a part of the jackpot (big hit E) is reached, a predetermined number of times after the jackpot ends. The (100 times) normal symbol low probability state is set. The state transition counter 203m is used to count whether or not the predetermined number of times has elapsed.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot is ended, a “jackpot E” is added that does not shift to either the special symbol high probability state or the normal symbol high probability state (time-short state). As shown in FIG. 63, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 8” is “big hit A”. The jackpot type when the value is “9 to 16” is “Big Jack B”, the jackpot type when the value is “17 to 47” is “Big Jack C”, and the value is “48”. , 49 ”is the jackpot type, and the jackpot type when the value is“ 50 to 99 ”is“ jackpot E ”. That is, when the jackpot is won, half of the jackpots are configured to be “jackpot E”.

  As described above, when the jackpot hits, the special symbol will move to the low probability state after the jackpot ends, and the normal symbol transitions to the normal state, so the probability of hitting the jackpot again at short intervals after the jackpot ends. Is low. That is, it is a jackpot that is disadvantageous for the player compared to other jackpot types. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls is easily maximized during the jackpot by setting the jackpot to a high probability state of a normal symbol. In the game rules, the normal symbol state in the so-called normal state (the state that shifts when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by depressing the RAM erase switch 122) matches the normal symbol state in the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the normal symbol is in a high probability state even in the normal state. For this reason, if there is no “big hit E” to shift to the low probability state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit, it will always be in the high probability state of the normal symbol during the game, giving the hole an unexpected disadvantage There is a risk of it. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the “big hit E” that shifts to the low probability state of the normal symbol after the big hit ends is provided, it is possible to suppress giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hole.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a state setting table 202f defined in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 64A shows the contents defined in the state setting table 202f.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a), when the normal state is set as the state of the pachinko machine 10 or when the jackpot is set, the special symbol has a low probability state and the normal symbol has a high probability state. Is set. Here, the case where the normal state is set is, for example, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, or after a special symbol low probability state is set a predetermined number of times after the jackpot is finished. For example, the number of symbol lotteries reaches a predetermined number. In addition, since the special symbol is set to the low probability state and the normal symbol is set to the high probability state at the start of the jackpot, the number of reserved balls is easily maximized during the jackpot.

  In addition, after the jackpots A to D are finished, a high probability state of a special symbol is set and a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. The high probability state of the special symbol continues until the special symbol is drawn 12 times, and then the low probability state of the special symbol is set. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the normal symbol is in a high probability state in the normal state, the normal symbol state is set to the same state as the normal state after the big hits A to D are completed. That is, the state of the normal symbol is the same as that during the jackpot. Therefore, even if paying attention to the state of the normal symbol, there is no change between the jackpot and after the jackpots A to D, so distinguish between the jackpot effect and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot Can be more difficult. In addition, the high probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol after the big hits A to D are continued until at least the next big hit.

  On the other hand, at the end of jackpot E, a low probability state of a special symbol is set and a low probability state of a normal symbol is set. The low probability state of the special symbol continues until at least the next big hit. Moreover, the low probability state of a normal symbol continues until a special symbol is drawn 100 times. After the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times, the normal state is set. That is, a high probability state of a normal symbol is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64 (b), the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the present embodiment is configured to go back and forth between three types of states. Specifically, the normal state, the probability variation state, and the low probability state. As described above, the normal state refers to a state where the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed and the power is turned on and the like. In addition, the probability variation state is a high probability state of a special symbol, and is a state set when any of the jackpots A to D ends. Further, the low probability state refers to a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol, and is a state set when the jackpot E is completed.

  In addition, the characters “right-handed navigator” or “left-handed navigator” written in parentheses on the right side of each state name indicate the direction in which the direction of launching the ball is suggested to the player in each state. ing. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 displays the direction in which the player should launch the ball. This navigation is configured to display directions that are advantageous to the player in each state.

  First, in the normal state, a right-handed navigation, that is, a display recommending that a game ball be launched to the right side of the board surface is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the suggestion display is performed so as to strike the ball toward the second entrance 640 provided on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. In the normal state, it is a high probability state of the normal symbol, and it becomes easy for the player to win the second entrance 640, so it is advantageous for the player to launch the ball aiming at the second entrance 640. . This normal state continues until one of the big hits.

  In the normal state, when any of the jackpots A to D is reached, after the jackpot is ended, the state shifts to a probability change state. Even in this probability variation state, right-handed navigation is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This probability change state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 12 times without winning the jackpot or until the jackpot E is won. When the special symbol lottery is executed 12 times without winning the jackpot, the game shifts to the normal state, and when the jackpot E is won, the game shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot.

  In the normal state or the low probability state that shifts when the big hit E is won in the probability variation state, a left-handed navigation, that is, a display recommending that a game ball be launched to the right side of the board surface is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Is done. That is, the suggestion display is performed so as to launch the ball aiming at the first entrance 64 provided at the lower center of the game board 13. This is because in the low probability state, the first entrance 64 is easier to win the ball than the second entrance 640. This low probability state continues until a special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot or one of the jackpots A to D is won. When the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, the game shifts to a normal state, and when one of the jackpots A to D is won, the game shifts to a probability change state.

  Although omitted from the illustration, the right-handed navigation is displayed in each jackpot round. In the present embodiment, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the right side when viewed from the front. This is because it is difficult to win.

  Further, as described above, since the normal state is set during the jackpot, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, since the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is easily opened, the ball launched toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. It becomes easy to win a prize at the second entrance located directly above. For this reason, in most cases, the number of reserved balls is 4 which is the maximum value by the end of the jackpot. Furthermore, when there is a lottery result that is a big hit in the holding ball, it becomes a “big hit E” with a probability of 50% (see FIG. 63). Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the big hit and the pseudo-interval effect from being repeated for a long time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unexpected disadvantage for the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds as described above.

  Among the timer interrupt processes, the processes of S101 to S103 and S107 to S109 are the same as the processes of S101 to S103 and S107 to S109 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed. In the timer interrupt process in the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process 3 in place of the special symbol variation process (S104), the start winning process (S105), and the normal symbol variation process (S106) in the first embodiment. (S121), start winning process 2 (S122), and normal symbol variation process 2 (S123) are executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the above-described special symbol variation process 3 (S121) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 3 (S121). The special symbol variation process 3 (S121) is the same as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the symbol display device 81.

  Among the special symbol variation process 3, in S201, S202, S209 to S215, and S218 to S220, S201, S202, S209 to S215 in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, and The same processes as those in S218 to S220 are executed. In the special symbol variation process 3 in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S202 that the special symbol is not varying (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 (second input) Fluctuation display hold count N2) in the special symbol based on the winning to the ball outlet 640 is acquired (S221). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is greater than 0 (S222), and it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is greater than 0. (S222: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 (S223), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 after subtraction is indicated. A reserve ball number command is set (S225). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the voice is stored. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

  After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S225, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225), and the special symbol variation start process is performed (S208). The process ends. The method for shifting data is the same as the processing in S207 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S222 that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is 0 (S222: No), then the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 (first value) Fluctuation display hold count N1) for a special symbol based on a winning at the entrance 64 is acquired (S225).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 acquired by the processing of S225 is larger than 0 (S226), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is determined. If it is 0 (S226: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is greater than 1 (S226: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 ( S227), a reserved ball number command indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203c1 after subtraction is set (S228). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and executed by the MPU 201 in the same manner as the reserved ball number command set by the process of S224. In the external output process (S1101) of FIG. 69), it is transmitted toward the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

  After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S228, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a1 is shifted (S229), and the special symbol change start process is performed (S208). The process ends. The method for shifting data is the same as the processing in S207 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above.

  Thus, in the special symbol variation process 3 of this embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are managed separately, and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is given priority at the start of the variation. It is configured to subtract automatically. This is because the lottery of the special symbol 2 is configured to be executed preferentially.

  Further, in the special symbol variation process 3 in this embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 0 (S214: No), or it is determined that the value of the probability changing counter 203e is greater than 0 ( S214: Yes), when the value of the probability changing counter 203e is decremented by 1, the process proceeds to S230. In the process of S230, it is determined whether or not the value of the state transition counter 203m is greater than 0 (S230).

  In the process of S230, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is greater than 0 (S230: Yes), the value of the state transition counter 203m is decremented by 1 (S231), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, in the process of S230, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S230: No), the process of S231 is skipped and the process proceeds to S218. To do. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the current state is the low probability state of the normal symbol based on the value of the state transition counter 203m.

  Next, the start winning process 2 (S122) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S122). In the start winning process 2 (S122), it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Is a process for executing pre-reading of a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  Of the start winning process 2, the process of S601 executes the same process as the process of S601 in the start winning process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. Then, in the start winning process 2 in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 (in the special symbol 1) The variable display hold count N1) is acquired (S621). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit value (ie, 4) (S622).

  Then, whether there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c1 is 4. If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S603: No), the process proceeds to S626. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S622: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203c1 is incremented by 1 (S623). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 changed by the calculation is set (S624).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the voice is stored. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S624, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 65) is acquired (S625).

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired by the process of S625, when it is determined by the process of S601 that there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) even if there is a winning at the ball opening 64 (S603: No), It is determined whether or not the second entrance 640 has been won (S626).

  If it is determined in the process of S626 that the ball has won the second entrance 640 (S626: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203c2 (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol 2) is determined. Obtain (S627). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (ie, 4) (S628).

  If there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S626: No), or even if there is a winning at the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203c2 is 4. If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S628: No), the process proceeds to S632. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the second entrance 640 (S626: Yes) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S628: Yes), the special symbol 2 is reserved. The value (N2) of the ball counter 203c2 is incremented by 1 (S629). Then, the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 changed by the calculation is set (S630).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, the voice is stored. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S630, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 65) is acquired (S631).

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired by the processing of S631, when it is determined by the processing of S626 that there is no winning at the second entrance 640 (S626: No), or the second winning If it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) even if there is a winning at the ball opening 640 (S628: No), the prefetch process is executed. In step S632, the process ends. This pre-reading process (S632) is a process for determining in advance the lottery result of the special symbol from each counter value acquired based on the start winning. This prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the above-described prefetching process (S632). In this pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether or not a ball has newly won at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. If it is determined that there is no new winning in either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S4101: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when there is a new winning at either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S4101: Yes), each process of S4102 to S4110 is executed. In each of the processes of S4102 to S4110, the same processes as the processes of S607 to S615 of the start winning process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, the number of held balls is managed separately according to the type of the entrance into which the ball entered, and pre-reading is executed for any start winning at any entrance. It is configured to do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the above-described normal symbol variation process 2 (S123) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process 2 (S123). The normal symbol variation process 2 (S123) is similar to the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, and the second symbol variation display performed on the second symbol display device 83 or the first entrance 64 is performed. Is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory accompanying the.

  Among the normal symbol variation process 2 (S123), in the respective processes of S701 to S707, S712, S713, S718, and S722 to S725, S701 to S707 in the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment, respectively. , S712, S713, S718, and S722 to S725 are executed. In the normal symbol variation process 2 in the third embodiment, when the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired in the process of S707 (S707), then Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the state transition counter 203m is greater than 1 (that is, whether or not the normal symbol is in a low probability state) (S731).

  In the process of S731, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is greater than 0 (S731: Yes), it indicates that the current state is a low probability state of the normal symbol, so the second acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C4 and the random number table for normal symbols for a low probability, a normal symbol lottery result is acquired (S732). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S731 that the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0 (S731: No), it indicates that the current state is a high probability state (time-short state) of the normal symbol, so that in S707 Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing and the random number table for normal symbol for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S733). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 9A). After the process of S732 or the process of S733 is completed, the process proceeds to S712.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to reset the value of the state transition counter 203m (that is, clear to 0) when setting the special symbol jackpot start. For this reason, since the value of the state transition counter 203m is determined to be 0 during the special symbol jackpot, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit based on the random number table for the normal symbol for high probability during the jackpot. The In other words, during the big hit, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than in the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is easily opened, it is possible to make it easy to win a ball to the second entrance 640 during the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the number of reserved balls to reach the maximum value (that is, four) before the end of the jackpot.

  It is determined by the processing of S712 that the symbol is a normal symbol (S712: Yes), and if the display mode of winning is set by the processing of S713 (S713), then whether or not the value of the state transition counter 203m is greater than 0 Is determined (S734). If it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is greater than 0 (S734: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol low probability state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640a. Is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S735), and the process proceeds to S737. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0 (S734: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time-short state) of the normal symbol, and is associated with the second entrance 640. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 1 second, the number of opening times is set to 2 (S736), and the process proceeds to S737.

  As described above, since the value of the state transition counter 203m is set to 0 during the jackpot, if the normal symbol is hit during the jackpot, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 Is set to 1 second, and the number of releases is set to 2 times. Therefore, since it is easy to win a ball to the second entrance 640 during the big hit, the number of reserved balls can easily become the maximum value (that is, four) before the big hit.

  In the process of S737, it is determined whether or not the value of the state transition counter state transition counter 203m is greater than 0 (S737). If it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is greater than 0 (that is, the normal symbol is in a low probability state) (S737: Yes), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30. The second is set (S738), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0 (that is, the normal symbol is in a high probability state) (S737: No), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is 3 The second is set (S739), and the process is terminated.

  As described above, during the jackpot, the value of the state transition counter 203m is set to 0. Therefore, when changing the normal symbol (second symbol) during the jackpot, the normal symbol is in a low probability state. In comparison, a short variation period (3 seconds) is selected. Therefore, since the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol can be increased during the jackpot, the number of hits of the normal symbol during the jackpot can also be increased. Therefore, since it is easy to win a ball to the second entrance 640 during the big hit, the number of reserved balls can easily become the maximum value (that is, four) before the big hit.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this main process. This main process is a process for executing the main control of the game at a cycle of 4 ms as described above.

  Of these main processes (see FIG. 70), the processes of S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116 are respectively the processes of S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116 in the main process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment. The same process is executed. And in the main process in 3rd Embodiment, it replaces with the jackpot control process (S1104) in 1st Embodiment, and the jackpot control process 3 (S1131) is performed. Details of the jackpot control process 3 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3. This jackpot control process 3 is similar to the jackpot control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 32), and is configured to open / close the special winning opening (big opening) 65a during the jackpot or start a new round. This is a process of setting a round number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113.

  Of the jackpot control process 3, the same processes as S1201 to S1208 and S1210 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment are executed in the processes of S1201 to S1208 and S1210, respectively. The In the jackpot control process 3 in the third embodiment, when the jackpot end is set (S1208), a setting value corresponding to the status after the jackpot is then set based on the status setting table 202f (see FIG. 64A). This is read and set (S1231), and this process is terminated. Since the setting value according to the state is defined in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 64A), in S1231, the state to be set is simply set in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 64A). It is sufficient to execute a simple process of selecting a setting value corresponding to. Therefore, for example, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with a case where a program for calculating a set value corresponding to a state is executed. Therefore, the state after the jackpot can be set without delay.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, of the two types of entrances (the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640), the second entrance 640 is designated as the specific prize entrance. (Large opening) 65a is provided directly above. In the normal state, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is easily opened (that is, the normal symbol has a high probability state). With this configuration, it is possible to easily open the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 during the jackpot that requires the normal symbol state to be the same as the normal state. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to hit the ball that was launched during the jackpot to the second entrance 640, so there is no number of balls held in the special variation period set after the jackpot ends. , The situation in which no change is made can be made difficult to occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pseudo-interval effect from continuing for a long time without ending the special variation period, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, when the pseudo-interval effect is configured to end within a predetermined time (10 seconds) regardless of whether or not the eight fluctuation pattern effects have been executed, no change state (the fluctuation pattern effect is not executed). The number of special symbol lotteries executed during the pseudo-interval effect decreases as the occurrence of a state in which there is no reserved ball) is more likely to occur. Therefore, the possibility of becoming a big hit again through the pseudo interval effect is reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the ball easily wins the second entrance 640 during the big hit, so the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is easily maximized. Therefore, since it can suppress that it will be in a non-fluctuating state during a pseudo interval production, possibility that it will be a big hit again through a pseudo interval production can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot state has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution that becomes “big hit E” (that is, big hit that shifts to a disadvantaged state for the player after completion of the big hit compared to other jackpot types) was a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be arbitrarily determined. For example, if it is determined that the hit ratio is too high when the distribution of “big hit E” is 50%, the percentage of “big hit E” is set to 60% or 70%, for example. It is good also as a structure which increases the jackpot which becomes disadvantageous for a person. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball-out rate will be too low, etc., the ratio of “big hit E” is set to 40% or 30%, for example, to reduce the big hit that is disadvantageous for the player. Also good.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the same jackpot type is selected if the value of the first hit type counter value CS1 in the case of the big win is the same regardless of the type of the entrance where the ball has won. However, a different jackpot type may be selected according to the type of the entrance. For example, if the ball is won based on winning the first entrance 64, the jackpot E is greater than if the ball is won based on entering the second entrance 640. It may be difficult to select. Thereby, the big hit E can be made difficult. Therefore, since it can suppress that the low probability state of a normal symbol unfavorable for a player is repeated endlessly, it can suppress that a player's motivation with respect to a game is scraped off. Further, when the ball hits the jackpot based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 than when the ball hits the jackpot based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, the jackpot E May be easily selected. Thereby, the jackpots A to D are continuous, and it is possible to prevent the high probability state of the normal symbol that is advantageous for the player from being repeated for a long time. Therefore, it can suppress that the ball-out rate of the pachinko machine 10 becomes too high, and brings an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the said 3rd Embodiment, it is set as the structure which provides two types of entrance (1st entrance 64, 2nd entrance 640), and by setting to the high probability state of a normal symbol during jackpot, It was easy for the ball to enter the 2 entrance 640. As a result, the number of reserved balls is likely to become the maximum value (ie, 4) during the big hit.

  In addition to this, in this modified example, two types of specific winning ports (specific winning port 65a, specific winning port 650a) are provided, and the jackpot ends when the ball wins the specific winning port 650a during the big hit It is configured to shift to a high probability state with a special symbol later. Further, the special winning opening 650a is configured to have different opening patterns depending on whether the special symbol 1 is won by a lottery or the special symbol 2 is a big winner. That is, the ease of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol is different between the case where the special symbol 1 is won by the lottery and the case where the special symbol 2 is the big winner. Although details will be described later, it is possible to prevent the exit rate from becoming too high by providing a entrance that does not easily shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, by providing a entrance that makes it easy to transition to a high probability state of a special symbol, a ball enters the entrance, so that players can expect a high probability state of a special symbol. You can hold them.

  First, with reference to FIG. 72, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an outline of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in a modification of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 72, in the game board 13 according to the modification of the third embodiment, a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in the lower right portion in front view, as in the third embodiment. A second entrance 640 is provided directly above the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a, and the electric accessory 640a rotates around the direction perpendicular to the game board 13 as a normal symbol. The ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second entrance.

  In addition, in this modification, a variable winning device 650 is provided in the lower left direction of the first entrance 64. The variable prize winning device 650 includes a specific prize opening 650a and an electric accessory 650b attached to the specific prize opening 650. Normally, the specific prize opening 650a is closed by the electric accessory 650b, and a ball is closed. It is difficult to enter the ball. On the other hand, in a predetermined round of jackpot (for example, the second round), for a certain period (for example, 0.5 seconds or 5 seconds), the electric accessory 650b operates to open the specific winning opening 650a. As a result, the ball easily enters the specific winning opening 650a, and if the ball can be won, the state shifts to a special symbol high probability state. This high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery is executed 12 times as in the third embodiment. In this way, whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol is determined depending on whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 650a. Can be easily understood visually. In addition, since the player can devise the timing of launching the ball, etc., if the player can enter the ball into the specific winning opening 650a, the player can acquire a high probability state of a special symbol by himself. It can be made to feel like this, and a sense of satisfaction and achievement can be given to the player.

  Further, as described above, the specific winning opening 650a is arranged at the lower left of the first winning opening 64, so that in the round (for example, the second round) in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened, the player specifies A ball that has been launched in order to win the winning hole 650a can easily win the first winning hole 64 as well. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is easily stored in the jackpot. In this modification, in addition to this, a predetermined round (for example, the second round) ), The number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 is easily increased. Since the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 can each be stored in a maximum of four, in this modification, there are a total of eight reserved balls before the end of jackpot. It can make it easy to become an individual state. Thereby, in the special fluctuation period set after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation in which there is no reserved ball number and no fluctuation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pseudo-interval effect from continuing for a long time without ending the special variation period, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, when the pseudo-interval effect is configured to end within a predetermined time (10 seconds) regardless of whether or not the eight fluctuation pattern effects have been executed, no change state (the fluctuation pattern effect is not executed). The number of special symbol lotteries executed during the pseudo-interval effect decreases as the occurrence of a state in which there is no reserved ball) is more likely to occur. Therefore, the possibility of becoming a big hit again through the pseudo interval effect is reduced. On the other hand, in this modified example, as described above, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 during the big hit, so that the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are reserved. It is configured to easily maximize the number of balls. Therefore, since it can suppress that it will be in a non-fluctuating state during a pseudo interval production, possibility that it will be a big hit again through a pseudo interval production can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot state has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b of this modification will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 650a is different between the case where the special symbol 1 is a lottery and the special symbol 2 that is a big winner. In the first hit type selection table 202b of the present modification, the big hit type and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 650a for each special symbol type are defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this modification is configured so that the specific winning opening 650a is opened only in the second round of the jackpot, and in the other rounds (the first round and the third and subsequent rounds) The mouth 65a is configured to be opened. The specific winning opening 650a opened in the second round is closed when the opening period defined in the first hit type selection table 202b elapses. Further, in the second round of jackpot, a display (left-handed navigation) that prompts the player to launch a ball on the left side of the game board 13 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, since it can prevent that a player forgets aiming at the specific winning opening 650a, it can suppress that a player misses the opportunity to acquire the high probability state of a special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 72, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 0 to 8, the big hit type is “big hit A1” (3R short open big hit) with the number of big hits being three rounds. In addition, when “Big Jack A1” is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1, an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 0.5 seconds in the second round of the big jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of winning the “big hit A1” in the special symbol 2 lottery, an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds.

  It should be noted that it takes 0.5 seconds or more from the time the player launches a ball aiming at the specific winning opening 650a until the hit ball reaches the specific winning opening 650a. When the pattern is selected, it is difficult to win the ball to the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in many cases, when “Big Jack A1” is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot is finished, and the low probability state of 100 normal symbols is set. . That is, a state corresponding to the case where the big hit E in the third embodiment is completed is set. On the other hand, when the 5 second release pattern is selected, it is sufficient time for the launched ball to reach the specific winning opening 650a, and in many cases, the player places the specific ball in the second round. A prize can be awarded to the mouth 650a. Therefore, if “Big Jack A1” is won in the special symbol 2 lottery, the special symbol high probability state is set and the normal symbol low probability state is set after the jackpot is completed.

  The jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 9 to 17 is “jackpot A2” (3R long open jackpot) in which the number of jackpot rounds is three. In the case of “big hit A2”, an opening pattern is set in which the special winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds regardless of whether the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is selected. Therefore, in the second round of “Big Jack A2”, it becomes easy to win the ball to the specific winning opening 650a. In many cases, a high probability state of 12 special symbols is set after the jackpot is finished. A high probability state of the symbol is set.

  When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 18 to 24, the big hit type is “big hit B1” (4R short open big hit) with four rounds. As in the case of “big hit A1”, when “big hit B1” is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, an opening pattern is set in which the special winning opening 650a is opened for 0.5 seconds in the second round of big hit. . On the other hand, in the case of winning the “big hit B1” in the special symbol 2 lottery, an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds. Therefore, in the lottery of the special symbol 1, when the “big hit B1” is won, in many cases, the low probability state of the special symbol is set and the low probability state of 100 normal symbols is set after the end of the big hit. . On the other hand, when “Big Jack B1” is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends. .

  When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 25 to 31, the big hit type is “big hit B2” (4R long open big hit) in which the number of big hits is four rounds. As in the case of “Big Bonus A2,” when “Winning Bonus B2” is won, the special winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds regardless of whether the lottery is for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. A pattern is set. Therefore, in the case of winning the “big hit B2”, in many cases, the high probability state of 12 special symbols is set and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the big hit.

  When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 32 to 63, the big hit type is “big hit C1” (6R short open big hit) with 6 rounds. As with “Big Jack A1” and “Big Jack B1”, if “Big Jack C1” is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, the special winning opening 650a is opened for 0.5 seconds in the second round of the big jackpot. A pattern is set. On the other hand, in the case of winning the “big hit C1” in the special symbol 2 lottery, an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds. Therefore, in the lottery of the special symbol 1, when the “big hit C1” is won, in many cases, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends, and the low probability state of 100 normal symbols is set. . On the other hand, in the lottery of the special symbol 2, when the “big hit C1” is won, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the end of the big hit. .

  The jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 64 to 95 is “jackpot C2” (6R long open jackpot) with the number of jackpot rounds being six. Similar to “Big Jack A2” and “Big Jack B2”, when “Big Jack C2” is won, regardless of whether it is a special symbol 1 lottery or a special symbol 2 lottery, the number of the special winning awards 650a is 5 An opening pattern that is opened for a second is set. Therefore, in the case of winning the “big hit C2”, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the end of the big hit.

  When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 96,97, the big hit type is “big hit D1” (15R short open big hit) with 15 rounds. As in the case of “big hit A1”, “big hit B1”, and “big hit C1”, when the “big hit D1” is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, the special winning opening 650a is 0.5 in the second round of big hit. An opening pattern is set that is released only for seconds. On the other hand, in the case of winning the “big hit D1” in the lottery of the special symbol 2, an opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds. Therefore, in the lottery of the special symbol 1, when the “big hit D1” is won, in many cases, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends, and the low probability state of the normal symbol of 100 times is set. . On the other hand, when “Big Jack D1” is won in the special symbol 2 lottery, in many cases, the high probability state of 12 special symbols is set and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends. .

  When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 98,99, the big hit type is “big hit D2” (15R long open big hit) with 15 rounds. Similar to “Big Jack A2,” “Big Jack B2,” and “Big Jack C2,” whether or not “Big Jack D2” is won, regardless of whether it is a special symbol 1 or a special symbol 2 An opening pattern is set in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds. Therefore, in the case of winning the “big hit D2”, in many cases, the high probability state of 12 special symbols is set and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the big hit.

  In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, when the big win is made by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the specific winning opening 650a is relatively long for the second round of the big win regardless of the type of the big hit ( 5 seconds). If the ball can be awarded to the special winning opening 650a, a high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the end of the big jackpot. In many cases, if the big symbol is won by the lottery of the special symbol 2, The high probability state of the special symbol is set on the basis of the end of.

  On the other hand, half of the cases where the special symbol 1 is won by lottery is a big hit ("big hit A1", " Jackpot B1 "," jackpot C1 ", and" jackpot D1 "). Therefore, if these big wins are made in the lottery of the special symbol 1, it is difficult to win the ball to the special winning opening 650a. Therefore, in many cases, a low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. The Therefore, compared to the special symbol 1 lottery, the player who wins the special symbol 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, in a round other than the second round of the big hit, a display (right-handed navigation) that prompts the player to hit the ball to the right side in order to win the ball to the specific winning opening 65a is displayed. Is done. In addition, since the jackpot of this modification is given at least 3 rounds, there are more opportunities for the player to aim at the right side of the game board 13. As a result, during the big hit, the opportunity to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 provided directly above the specific winning opening 65a is the opportunity to enter the ball into the first entrance 64. More than that. Further, in the present modification, when the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 exist, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed. Therefore, the special symbol 2 lottery is given priority in the special variation period after the jackpot ends. Therefore, if the big winner is won in the special variation period, there is a high possibility that the special symbol 2 will be a big winner. . Therefore, the jackpot and the high probability state of the special symbol can be easily repeated (that is, the frequency at which the jackpot is started again through the pseudo-interval effect executed after the jackpot ends). The expectation that a jackpot will continue for a long time can be enhanced.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification has a configuration in which two types of specific winning ports (specific winning port 65a and specific winning port 650a) are provided, and a ball wins into the specific winning port 650a during the big hit. Furthermore, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol is shifted to a high probability state. Thereby, it can be made easy to understand visually whether it shifts to the high probability state of a special symbol. In addition, since the player can devise the timing of launching the ball, etc., if the player can enter the ball into the specific winning opening 650a, the player can acquire a high probability state of a special symbol by himself. It can be made to feel like this, and a sense of satisfaction and achievement can be given to the player.

  In addition, the special winning pattern 650a opening pattern is different between the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery. In this case, it is advantageous for the player (that is, the opportunity to enter the ball into the specific winning opening 650a increases). Further, in the present modification, when the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 exist, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed. Therefore, the special symbol 2 lottery is given priority in the special variation period after the jackpot ends. Therefore, if the big winner is won in the special variation period, there is a high possibility that the special symbol 2 will be a big winner. . Therefore, the jackpot and the high probability state of the special symbol can be easily repeated (that is, the frequency at which the jackpot is started again through the pseudo-interval effect executed after the jackpot ends). The expectation that a jackpot will continue for a long time can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the specific winning opening 650a is arranged at the lower left of the first winning opening 64, the player wins the specific winning opening 650a in the round (second round) in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened. The ball that has been launched is likely to win the first entrance 64. Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 in the second round. Thereby, in the special fluctuation period set after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation in which there is no reserved ball number and no fluctuation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pseudo-interval effect from continuing for a long time without ending the special variation period, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, in the special variation period, regardless of whether or not eight variation pattern effects have been executed, when the pseudo-interval effect is terminated in a predetermined time (10 seconds), a non-variable state (variation pattern) The number of special symbol lotteries executed during the pseudo-interval production decreases as the production is more difficult to occur and the holding ball does not exist. Therefore, the possibility of becoming a big hit again through the pseudo interval effect is reduced. On the other hand, in this modified example, as described above, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 during the big hit, so that the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are reserved. It is configured to easily maximize the number of balls. Therefore, since it can suppress that it will be in a non-fluctuating state during a pseudo interval production, possibility that it will be a big hit again through a pseudo interval production can be raised. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot state has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In this modification, compared to the special symbol 1 lottery, when the special symbol 2 lottery is a big hit, there is a higher possibility of shifting to a high probability state of the special symbol. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the lottery of the special symbol 1 may be configured to increase the possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol when a big hit is made. As described above, in the third embodiment and the modification of the third embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set after the end of the jackpot, the first input is performed until the low probability state of the normal symbol is ended. A suggestion display prompting the user to enter the sphere 64 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In other words, the special symbol 1 lottery is mainly executed in a low probability state of a normal symbol which is disadvantageous to the player. For this reason, if a special symbol 1 lottery is won, the special symbol's low probability state will be repeated endlessly, and the player's motivation for the game will be reduced. There is a risk of it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation by increasing the possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol when the special symbol 1 is won by lottery.

  In this modification, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 0.5 seconds or 5 seconds in the second round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be opened in the first round or the third round, or may be configured to be opened in a plurality of rounds. Moreover, you may comprise so that the round opened only by some jackpots may be provided. For example, you may comprise so that the round which the specific winning opening 650a may be open | released only by "big hit D1" and "big hit D2". Furthermore, the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a is not limited to the aspect of this modified example, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, it is good also as a structure which provides 1 second and 10 seconds as an open period.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 74 and FIG. 75, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, a variation pattern effect with a fixed variation period is selected every number of special symbol lotteries during the special variation period. More specifically, if the special symbol drawn at the first or second time after the jackpot is missed, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds (special variation A) is selected and the jackpot If the 3rd or 4th special symbol lottery is off after the end, the 1st variation pattern will be selected, and the 5th to 8th special symbol will be displayed after the big hit. When the lottery is not selected, a variation pattern having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected. With this configuration, the time required to execute the variation pattern effect that is out of place a predetermined number of times (eight times in the first embodiment) is set to a fixed time (8 seconds). In addition, when the big hit is made after the jackpot ends and the special symbol lottery is performed eight times, the variation time is set according to the remaining predetermined number of times (remaining time until the predetermined time) (for example, the first time 8 seconds and 6 seconds for the second time), the special variation period is set to a fixed time (8 seconds). In other words, in order to set the special variation period to the predetermined time (8 seconds) in all the lottery times, it is necessary to prepare a variation pattern that is a big hit with different variation times according to all the variation times.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, for each special symbol lottery number in the special fluctuation period, the fluctuation of the fixed fluctuation period depends on whether the lottery result and the lottery result (prefetch result) in the holding area are big hits or not. A pattern effect is selected. Thus, depending on the remaining predetermined number of times (remaining time until the predetermined time), the variation pattern effect that is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern effect that is out of the point when the lottery result (prefetch result) of the jackpot can be determined The production time can be set. Therefore, since the type of effect time of the variation pattern effect that is a big hit can be reduced, the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, regardless of whether or not a big hit is made in the middle of the special variation period, it is possible to gradually reduce the variation time of the variation display executed a plurality of times in one special variation period. Here, in the first embodiment, when the big hit is made during the special fluctuation period, the fluctuation pattern has a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern effect executed one time before, unless the big lottery is made in the eighth lottery. The production was configured to be selected. For this reason, when a variation pattern effect with a long variation time is executed during the special variation period, the player may be able to recognize that it was a big hit in the middle of the special variation period. There was a risk of being unable to enjoy. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the variation time of the variation pattern effect can be reduced as the number of lotteries for the special symbol increases, regardless of whether or not the big win is made during the special variation period. It can be made difficult to predict whether or not it is a big hit depending on time. Therefore, since it is difficult to predict the result of the pseudo interval effect in advance, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the contents of the special variation pattern selection table 202e in the ROM 202 are changed in the main controller 110. is there. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first implementation. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the special variation pattern selection table 202e in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a special variation pattern selection table 202e. This special variation pattern selection table 202e is a data table for determining the variation time during the special variation period, as in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the special variation pattern selection table 202e according to the fourth embodiment includes a special symbol lottery count after the big hit is completed, and whether there is a lottery result that is a big hit in the starting ball or the holding ball. The fluctuation time during the special fluctuation period is specified accordingly. According to the special variation pattern selection table 202e, when there is a holding ball that is a big hit, a special hit pattern of the holding ball and a holding ball that displays a fluctuation variation until the change of the holding ball is executed. The variable period is configured to be a fixed time (8 seconds).

  A specific description will be given with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 shows a correspondence relationship between the fluctuating effect, the jackpot effect, and the state of the specific winning opening that are executed during the pseudo-interval effect that is executed after the end of the jackpot. FIG. 75 (a) is a diagram showing a case where the third special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends, and FIG. 75 (b) is a seventh special symbol after the jackpot ends. It is the figure which showed the case where it becomes a big hit by the lottery of. For example, if a special symbol lottery is won in the third special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends, that is, when the special symbol lottery is performed for the first time after the jackpot ends, the lottery result stored in the holding second area is When the big hit is determined by prefetching, the special variation F having the variation time of 4 seconds is selected as the variation pattern effect mode executed for the first time. In addition, when the execution of the special variation F is finished and the data in the reserved first area is shifted to the execution area (that is, when the second special symbol lottery timing comes after the end of the jackpot), the reserved first area is Since it is a big hit state, the special variation A having a variation time of 2 seconds is selected. Further, in the special symbol lottery executed for the third time after the jackpot is completed, the data of the execution area is a lottery result indicating the jackpot, so the special variation A having a variation time of 2 seconds is selected (FIG. 75). (A)).

  As another case, when the big win is made in the 7th special symbol lottery after the big win is over, there is no information indicating the big hit on the holding ball in the special symbol lottery executed for the first to the third time. . Therefore, the special variation A (2 seconds) is selected for the first time and the second time, and the special variation B (1 second) is selected for the third time. In addition, the variation pattern effect executed at the 4th to 7th times is the 4th time the probability change number is 4th and the hold 3 is hit, the 5th time the probability change number is the 5th and the hold 2 is hit, and the 6th time is the change. The number of times is 6th, hold 1 hit, the 7th time is the 7th time the probability change number is 7th, and the start is hit, so the 4th and 5th are special fluctuation B (1 second), the 6th and 7th are special fluctuation C (0.5 seconds) is selected (FIG. 75 (b)).

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the next jackpot is set to 8 seconds, and the type of the effect time of the variation pattern effect is 7 of special variations A to G. Compared to the first embodiment where the types are required, it can be configured with fewer types of effect times with five types of special variations A to D and F. In addition, the variation time of the variation display executed a plurality of times in one special variation period can always be gradually reduced.

  Therefore, the types of various tables such as a display data table corresponding to the variation time of each variation pattern can be reduced as compared with the first embodiment, and the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, in the first embodiment, the player can recognize that it has been a big hit in the middle of the special variation period by increasing the variation time of the variation display, and the player for the last performance in the special variation period It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game without causing a problem that the interest of the player may decrease.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84. In the first embodiment, the award ball payout speed is constant. In other words, when the payout of the prize ball is executed, the payout is paused for 1 second each time 10 prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 (a payout pause period of 1 second is set). . Further, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that the time required for paying out 10 prize balls by the payout motor 216 is 1 second.

  In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is configured such that the payout speed of the prize ball varies depending on the number of rounds. Specifically, the award ball payout speed (the rotation speed of the payout motor 216) is decreased as the number of rounds progresses, and the period during which the award ball is paid out becomes longer in the latter half of the jackpot. As a result, the prize balls are paid out little by little during the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot ends, and the player's consciousness can be directed toward paying out the prize ball during the pseudo-interval effect. . That is, by suppressing the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval effect, it is more difficult to distinguish between the jackpot effect and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the main controller 110 has a payout speed selection table 202g added to the ROM 202 and the RAM 203. The payout counter 203n is added, the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially different, and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 executes it. The various processes to be performed are different. Other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the first embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment is provided with a payout speed selection table 202g in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 77, but this payout speed selection table 202g is referred to in order to set the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 when paying out a prize ball in each jackpot round. It is a data table. By referring to the payout speed selection table 202g, the payout speed of the winning ball can be reduced in the latter half of the jackpot. Therefore, the payout of the winning ball during the jackpot is continued even after the jackpot ends (that is, during the pseudo-interval effect), so that the player's consciousness can be directed to paying out the winning ball during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's consciousness from being concentrated on the pseudo-interval effect, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot ends.

  FIG. 76B is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76B, the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment is provided with a payout counter 203n in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The payout counter 203n is a counter that is updated according to the number of jackpot rounds. In the present embodiment, the winning ball payout speed is varied based on the value of the payout counter 203n and the specified contents of the payout speed selection table 202g. If the value of the payout counter 203n is 0, it indicates a normal state other than the jackpot state, or a state of the first round of jackpot. Each time the jackpot round advances, the value of the payout counter 203n is incremented by one. That is, the value of the payout counter 203n is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of jackpot rounds. The value of the payout counter 203n is cleared to 0 when the jackpot ends (see S1242 in FIG. 80). In addition, 0 is also set when the RAM 203 is initialized (see S1014 in FIG. 30) in the startup process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 30).

  Next, the payout speed selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the payout speed selection table 202g is a data table that is referred to in order to set the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 when paying out a prize ball in each jackpot round.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in the payout speed selection table 202g, the rotational speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 is defined in association with the value of the payout counter 203n. Specifically, if the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (that is, if it is the first round of big hit or the normal state), a normal speed is set as the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 ( 10 prize balls are paid out per second). If the value of the payout counter 203n is 1 (that is, if it is the second round of the big hit), the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 is “low speed 1”, that is, eight prizes per second. The speed at which the ball is dispensed is set. Further, if the value of the payout counter 203n is 2 (that is, if it is the third round of the big hit), the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 is “low speed 2”, that is, 6 per second. The speed at which the prize balls are paid out is set. On the other hand, if the value of the payout counter 203n is 3 to 14 (that is, after the fourth round of the big hit), the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 is “low speed 3”, that is, 5 per second. The speed at which the prize balls are paid out is set.

  In this way, as the jackpot round progresses, the speed at which the prize ball is paid out gradually decreases, so that the prize ball is paid out after the jackpot is finished (that is, a pseudo-interval effect). Middle) will continue. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to paying out the prize ball during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's consciousness from being concentrated on the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the interval effect during the jackpot from the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot ends. In addition, even if the jackpot does not win after the pseudo-interval effect, the player can be immersed in the reverberation of the previous jackpot by continuously paying out the prize ball, and disappointed that the jackpot did not continue The feeling can be reduced. The payout speed is not limited to the value defined in the payout speed selection table 202g of the present embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined. Also, variations in the payout speed are not limited to four types (normal speed, low speed 1, low speed 2, and low speed 3). For example, there may be fewer variations than in this embodiment, such as two types of payout speeds. In addition, for example, the number of payout speeds may be 10 types, and variations may be increased as compared to the present embodiment.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. First, FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment. This main process is a process for executing the main control of the game at a cycle of 4 ms as described above.

  Among these main processes, the processes of S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116 are the same as the processes of S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116 in the main process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, respectively. Executed. In the main process in the fifth embodiment, when a prize ball counting signal or a payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 is read in the process of S1103, then a payout command setting process is executed (S1141). Instead of the jackpot control process (S1104) in the first embodiment, the jackpot control process 4 (S1141) is executed. Details of these payout command setting processing (S1141) and jackpot control processing 4 (S1142) will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80 that follow.

  First, the payout command setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. The payout command setting process is a process for setting a payout command for causing the payout control device 111 to pay out a prize ball. The payout command is set in a form including information indicating the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216. Based on this payout command, the payout control device 111 pays out a prize ball based on information indicating the number of prize balls and information indicating the rotational speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216.

  In the payout command setting process (see FIG. 79), first, it is determined whether or not winning information exists (S4201). Here, the winning information includes winning information for the first winning slot 64 and the normal winning slot 67 in addition to the winning of the ball for the specific winning slot 65a. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that there is no winning information (S4201: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that winning information is present (S4201: Yes), then whether or not winning information indicating winning in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a exists in the winning information. Is determined (S4202). If it is determined that there is winning information indicating a winning at the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (S4202: Yes), the value of the payout counter 202n is read and the specified contents of the payout speed selection table 202g By comparison, the rotational speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 when paying out the current prize ball is specified (S4203). Then, a payout command including information indicating the specified payout speed and information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out is set (S4204), and this process is terminated.

  In the process of S4202, there is no winning information indicating winning in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (that is, only winning information in the first winning slot 64 or the normal winning slot 67 exists). When it is determined (S4202: No), it includes information indicating a payout speed corresponding to the normal speed (that is, a payout speed at which 10 prize balls are paid out per second) and information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out. The payout command is set (S4205), and this process is terminated. The payout command set by the process of S4204 or S4205 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the payout control device 111. Upon receipt of the payout command, the payout control device 111 extracts information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and information indicating the payout speed from the payout command, and executes payout based on the extracted information.

  Next, the jackpot control process 4 described above will be described with reference to FIG. This jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 80) is similar to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and the opening / closing of the special winning opening (big opening opening) 65a during the jackpot is performed. Or setting a round number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the start of a new round.

  Of the jackpot control process 4, each process of S1201 to S1210 executes the same process as each process of S1201 to S1210 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. Then, in the jackpot control process 4 in the fifth embodiment, it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1202), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set to open (S1203), and the round number command is set. If (S1204) is performed, then 1 is added to the value of the payout counter 203n (S1241), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78). By updating the value of the payout counter 203n at the start timing of a new round, the payout speed can be set to a speed corresponding to each round from the beginning of each round.

  In the jackpot control process 4 of the present embodiment, the end of jackpot is set (S1208), and the values after the jackpot end are set in various counters (probability changing counter 203e, hour-shorting counter 203f, special fluctuation counter 203g). (S1209) Next, the value of the payout counter 203n is reset by setting it to 0 (S1242), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Process of Payment Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a main process of the payout control device 111. This main process is started by a reset at power-on.

  In this main process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4301). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Next, it waits for the receipt of a payout permission command transmitted from main controller 110 (S4302: No). When a payout permission command is received (S4302: Yes), RAM access is permitted (S4303), and an external interrupt vector is set (S4304).

  After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4305). If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4305: Yes), the process is performed to clear (erase) the backup data in S4315. Migrate to On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S4305: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area of the RAM 213 (S4306). If not stored (S4306). : No), since the backup data is not stored, in this case as well, the process proceeds to S4315. If the occurrence information of power shutdown is stored in the backup area (S4306: Yes), the RAM judgment value is calculated (S4307), and the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S4308: No), that is, calculated. If the RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the processing after S4315, initialization processing of the RAM 213 is executed. In this initialization process, first, the used area of the RAM 213 is cleared to 0 (S4315), and the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S4316). Thereafter, the MPU 211 peripheral device is initialized (S4317), an interrupt is permitted (S4318), and the process proceeds to a payout control process described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not pressed (S4305: No), the occurrence information of the power shutdown is set (S4306: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. (S4308: Yes), processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power-off recovery) is executed. That is, the stack pointer at the time of power shutdown is restored (S4309), and the information on occurrence of power shutdown is cleared (S4310). Also, the MPU 211 peripheral device is initialized (S4311), and the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 213 (S4312). Further, it is confirmed whether or not the interrupt is permitted before the power is turned off (S4313). If the interrupt is permitted (S4313: Yes), the interrupt is permitted (S4314), while the interrupt is prohibited when the power is turned off. If it is in the state (S4313: No), the processing is returned to the address before the power is shut off while the interruption is prohibited.

  Next, the above-described payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This payout control process is executed subsequent to the main process (see FIG. 81) of the payout control device 111, and is a process for setting payout of prize balls and balls. In this payout control process, first, a command from the main control device 110 is acquired, the total number of winning balls is memorized (S4401), and then the firing permission is set for the firing control device 112 (S4402). ). Then, the state of the state return switch is checked, and if the state return switch is pressed, the state return operation is executed (S4403). Here, the state return switch is a switch for causing the payout motor 216 to perform a state return operation when pressed by a hall clerk or the like when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs. Specifically, when the state return switch is pressed, as a state return operation, the payout motor 216 rotates in the opposite direction to normal, so that the ball clogging is eliminated (that is, the normal state is restored). It is configured.

  Thereafter, the setting of the lower pan full tank state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower pan unit 15 (S4404). That is, the full state of the lower plate unit 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set, and the lower plate is not full. Occasionally, the lower pan full tank release state is set. Also, the setting of the tank ball absence state or the tank ball absence release state is executed according to the change in the tank ball state (S4405). In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball no state is executed. Perform configuration. Thereafter, the presence / absence of a notification state is determined, and if there is a notification state, notification is made by a 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 (S4406).

  Next, a process for paying out a prize ball is executed by each process of S4407 to S4409. That is, if the prize ball is not paid out and the total number of prize balls stored in S4401 is not 0 (S4407: No, S4408: No), the prize ball control process is started (S4409). On the other hand, if the prize ball cannot be paid out (S4407: Yes) or if the total number of prize balls is 0 (S4408: Yes), the process proceeds to a process for paying out a lent. The prize ball control process (S4409) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing for paying out a ball in S4410 to S4412, if the ball is not in a payout-disabled state and if a loan-out request from the card unit is received (S4410: No, S4411: Yes) The ball control process (S4412) is started. On the other hand, if the rental ball cannot be paid out (S4410: Yes) or if a rental ball payout request has not been received (S4411: No), the subsequent ball removal process is executed (S4413). The ball rental control process (S4412) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the ball removal process (S4413), the payout motor 216 is driven and the ball removal process is executed (S4413) on condition that the state return switch is checked and the ball removal is not disabled and the ball removal operation is not started. Subsequently, the control of the vibrator provided on the tank rail (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the balls are clogged (S4414). Specifically, when ball clogging occurs in the vicinity of the tank rail, vibration is applied to the tank rail by driving the vibrator to eliminate the ball clogging. Thereafter, the process returns to the top of the payout control process, and thereafter, the processes of S4401 to S4414 described above are repeatedly executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the above-described prize ball control process will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the winning ball payout process. In the prize ball payout process, first, the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 is driven at a speed based on the payout command output from the main controller 110, and prize balls are paid out (S4501). Next, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor (S4502). And the stop process of the payout motor 216 are executed (S4503), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

  If it is determined that the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal (S4502: Yes), it is determined from the detection result of the payout count switch whether the game ball is normally counted (S4504). If it is determined that the game ball count is not normal (S4504: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to execute a retry process, and the payout motor 216 is stopped (S4505). End and return to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

  Further, if it is determined that the game ball count is normal as a result of the processing of S4504 (S4504: Yes), whether or not the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch has reached the total number of winning balls (ie, It is determined whether or not the payout of the prize ball instructed by the payout command has been completed (S4506). If the payout has been completed (S4506: Yes), stop processing of the payout motor 216 is executed (S4507), This process is terminated and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4506 that the payout of the winning ball has not been completed (S4506: No), the process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the above-described ball rental control process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this lending control process. In the ball lending control process, first, the payout motor 216 is driven to pay out a lending ball (S4601). Next, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor (S4602). At the same time, a stop process of the payout motor 216 is executed (S4603), and this process ends and returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

  Further, in the process of S4602, when it is determined that the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal (S4602: Yes), it is determined from the detection result of the payout count switch whether the game ball is normally counted. (S4604). If it is determined in step S4604 that the game ball count is not normal (S4604: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to execute a retry process, and the payout motor 216 is stopped (S1205). ), This process is terminated, and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

  Furthermore, in the processing of S4604, when it is determined that the game ball count is normal (S4604: Yes), the game ball count by the payout count switch reaches a predetermined number of rented balls (25) and the payout is made. It is determined whether or not the payout has been completed (S4606). If the payout has been completed (S4606: Yes), the payout motor 216 is stopped (S4607), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4606, when it is determined that the predetermined number of lent balls (25) has not been paid out (S4606: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is configured such that the rotational speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 that is driven to pay out the prize ball decreases as the big hit round progresses. Yes. Thereby, since the time for paying out the big hit prize ball can be prolonged, it is possible to continue paying out the winning ball even after the big hit is finished (that is, during the pseudo interval production). Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to paying out the prize ball during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's consciousness from being concentrated on the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the interval effect during the jackpot from the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot ends. In addition, even if the jackpot does not win after the pseudo-interval effect, the player can be immersed in the reverberation of the previous jackpot by continuously paying out the prize ball, and disappointed that the jackpot did not continue The feeling can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be paid out per second is reduced by slowing down the rotation speed of the payout motor 216 (that is, it is necessary for paying out the prize balls). It was a long time), but is not limited to this. For example, the payout speed may be slowed by increasing the frequency of the payout suspension period. Specifically, for example, a one-second payout suspension period is set every time ten prize balls are paid out, but eight prize balls are paid out as the number of jackpot rounds increases. Alternatively, a payout suspension period may be set for every payout of five prize balls. Further, the payout suspension period may be longer as the number of rounds progresses.

  In the present embodiment, the payout speed is always slow until the third round, and the slowest payout speed is set to “low speed 3” after the third round. However, the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, at the start of each round, it may be configured to execute a lottery for determining whether or not to reduce the payout speed, and may be configured to randomly decrease the payout speed. Further, the payout speed may be increased or decreased according to the number of rounds. For example, if “big hit D (15 round big hit)” with a large number of rounds continues, most of the winning balls will be paid out at the slowest payout speed (low speed 3). For this reason, even after the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect are finished and the normal variation pattern effect is executed, the payout of the prize ball may be continuously executed. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy that there is a problem in the payout control of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, for example, the 5th to 12th rounds of “Large D” are configured to return to the normal payout speed, and the 13th to 15th rounds are configured to slow down the payout speed one step at a time. May be. In addition, the payout speed may be configured to be higher than the normal speed in a round (for example, 5 rounds or 10 rounds) in the middle of “big hit D”. As a result, it is possible to prevent the payout of the prize ball from being continuously executed even after the normal fluctuation pattern effect is executed. Therefore, it can suppress making a player misidentify that the malfunction occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the payout speed is slowed at the start of each jackpot round, but the trigger for changing the payout speed is not limited to this. For example, in each round, the payout speed may be varied based on the number of times the ball has won the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. For example, when the ball has won the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a for the first time to the seventh time, the winning ball is paid out at the normal speed, and the ball is the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a for the eighth time. When the player wins a prize, the payout speed is set to “low speed 1” to pay out the prize ball, and when the ball wins the specific prize opening (large opening) 65a for the ninth time, the payout speed is set to “ Set “Low Speed 2” to pay out the prize ball, and if the 10th time the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the payout speed is set to “Low Speed 3” and the prize ball is paid out. You may comprise so that it may perform. As a result, in one round period, the payout speed can be reduced in the second half of the period, so that the winning ball can be paid out during the interval period after each round or during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to paying out the prize ball during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's consciousness from being concentrated on the pseudo-interval effect, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect that is executed during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot ends. In addition, even if the jackpot does not win after the pseudo-interval effect, the player can be immersed in the reverberation of the previous jackpot by continuously paying out the prize ball, and disappointed that the jackpot did not continue The feeling can be reduced.

  Further, the payout speed of the payout balls to be paid out based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is set to other entrances (first entrance 64, normal entrance 67, etc. ), The payout speed of the award ball to be paid out based on the winning of the ball may be slower, and the award ball may be continuously paid out during the special variation period. With this configuration, the player's consciousness can be directed to the winning ball, so that it is more difficult to distinguish between the pseudo-interval effect and the jackpot interval effect. In addition, even if the jackpot does not win after the pseudo-interval effect, the player can be immersed in the reverberation of the previous jackpot by continuously paying out the prize ball, and disappointed that the jackpot did not continue The feeling can be reduced. Further, since the payout of prize balls increases during the jackpot, excessive heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed by reducing the payout speed in the second half of the jackpot.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the payout speed is reduced as the round progresses uniformly in all jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if pre-reading is executed during a jackpot, and it is determined that the lottery result that is a jackpot is held, the payout speed of the prize ball is slowed down, and the prize ball continues to be paid out even during the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot You may comprise as follows. As a result, the player's consciousness can be directed toward paying out the winning ball in the pseudo-interval effect that is executed between the current jackpot and the next jackpot, so that the player is aware that the jackpot has once ended. Can be hard to notice. Therefore, since the jackpot can be felt as continuing for a long time, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the other hand, if the lottery result that is a big hit is not held in the pre-fetching during the big hit, the payout speed is slowed every time the round progresses, and if it is determined that the lottery result that is a big hit is held The payout speed may be set to a normal speed (or a speed higher than normal). If the lottery result that is a big hit during the jackpot is not held, there is a possibility that the end of the jackpot will be notified as a result of the pseudo-interval effect. In this case, if the payout speed of the winning ball is slowed down and the winning ball is continuously paid out even after the end of the jackpot is notified, the player can be immersed in the last jackpot remnant. This can reduce the disappointment that the jackpot did not continue. On the other hand, when the big hit is made again via the pseudo-interval effect, a lot of prize balls are paid out even at the next big hit, so the time required for paying out the prize balls may be prolonged. In other words, there is a possibility that the payout of the prize ball may continue to be executed for a long time after repeating the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect (that is, during the execution of the normal variation pattern effect). There is a risk of misunderstanding that the machine 10 has malfunctioned. Therefore, when it is determined that the lottery result that is a big hit is on hold, by setting the payout speed to the normal speed (or a speed faster than normal), the prize is repeatedly given during the execution of the normal variation pattern effect. It is possible to prevent the ball payout from continuing to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from misidentifying that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem.

  Further, in the first round of jackpot, it may be configured such that the payout speed of the prize ball is faster than the normal speed (for example, the speed at which 15 prize balls are paid out per second). As a result, the balls used for the jackpot game can be secured more quickly, so that it is possible to prevent the situation where the player cannot play the jackpot game because the possession ball is lost during the jackpot game. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy a game with a big hit. In addition, when the big hit is made through the pseudo interval effect (that is, when the big hit is made again in a short period after the previous big hit is finished), the payout speed of the first round is set to the normal speed, When a big hit is made without going through the pseudo-interval effect, the payout speed may be increased. In the case of a big hit via a pseudo-interval effect, the player has already secured a sufficient number of balls to use for the big hit game, since it has been a big hit in a short period since the end of the previous big hit. This is because. Also, if the payout speed is always increased in the first round, the player can recognize the payout speed difference in the jackpot via the pseudo-interval effect, and can recognize whether it is the first round. There is a risk of it. In this embodiment, since there is no jackpot for the number of rounds equal to or less than two rounds, if it can be recognized that the present is the first round, the continuation of the jackpot is suggested and displayed in at least two subsequent interval effects. It can be recognized. That is, since the result of the interval effect for two times can be predicted first, the interval effect for two times cannot be enjoyed. On the other hand, if a big hit is made through a pseudo-interval effect, if the payout speed of the first round is set to a normal speed, the player recognizes whether or not it is the first round of a new jackpot Can be difficult to do. Therefore, it is possible to carefully check whether or not the jackpot continues in each interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player in each interval effect.

  In the present embodiment, information indicating the number of prize balls and information indicating the rotational speed of the payout motor 216 are included in the payout command, but the payout command is information indicating payout of one prize ball. It may be configured. For example, when paying out 15 prize balls, the payout command may be output 15 times continuously. In addition, each time a big hit round progresses, the number of payout commands that can be output per second may be reduced (the interval at which payout commands are output is increased). For example, the first round of jackpots is configured to be able to output a maximum of 10 payout commands per second, the second round is configured to be able to output a maximum of 8 payout commands per second, and the third round The payout command may be output 6 times per second, and the payout command may be output 5 times per second after 4 rounds. Thereby, since the time from the start of payout of the prize ball to the end can be delayed, the prize ball can be paid out even during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to the prize ball to be paid out, so that it is possible to prevent the pseudo interval effect from being watched. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish the pseudo-interval effect from the jackpot effect.

  In the present embodiment, the payout command includes information indicating the number of prize balls and information indicating the rotation speed of the payout motor 216. However, the payout command includes only information indicating the number of prize balls, The payout control device 111 may be configured to vary the rotation speed of the payout motor 216. Specifically, for example, depending on the frequency of a payout command (payout command corresponding to 15 prize balls) based on the winning of a ball to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, whether the current round is an interval It may be configured that the number of rounds is determined by determining whether it is in the middle, and the payout speed of the winning ball is decreased based on the determined number of rounds. In addition, for example, when a prize ball payout command is continuously output and the prize ball payout corresponding to the newly output payout command is put on hold, that is, output in time earlier. The payout speed is slowed down when the award ball corresponding to the newly issued payout command is stocked because the award ball corresponding to the payout command continues. May be. In this case, the payout speed may be varied based on the number of stocked unpaid prize balls. For example, when the number of unpaid prize balls reaches 10, the payout speed may be slower than the normal speed (for example, low speed 1). Further, for example, when the number of unpaid award balls is 30, the payout speed is set to a low speed 2, and when the number of unpaid award balls is 50, the payout speed is set to a low speed 3 You may comprise so that it may set to. As described above, by adopting a configuration in which the payout speed is varied by the payout control device 111, the types of payout commands output from the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the processing load of the main controller 110 that is a big hit can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load of the main controller 110 that is a big hit increases, the closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is delayed, or conversely, the opening timing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is delayed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as delays.

  Further, a part of the unpaid prize balls stocked in the payout control device 111 may be held until the end of the jackpot, and the stocked prize balls may be paid out after the jackpot ends. Thereby, since the prize ball can be paid out even during the pseudo-interval effect, the player's consciousness can be directed to the prize ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish the pseudo-interval effect from the jackpot interval effect. It should be noted that payout of stocked prize balls may be started when the jackpot ends, or may be configured to pay out based on a predetermined trigger. The predetermined trigger includes, for example, the timing at which the symbol is fixedly displayed in the variation pattern effect that is first executed after the end of the jackpot, the timing at which the first winning prize is received after the end of the jackpot, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the example in which the payout speed is varied for the pachinko machine 10 that performs the pseudo-interval effect has been described. You may comprise. Specifically, as the number of jackpot rounds progresses, the payout speed may be slowed so that the payout of award balls continues for a certain period after the jackpot ends. As a result, the player can be immersed in the last jackpot reverberation, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Variation of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the period required for paying out the winning ball is varied by varying the rotation speed (dispensing speed) of the dispensing motor 216. As a result, during the pseudo-interval production, the jackpot winning ball is continuously paid out so that the player's consciousness is paid out.

  On the other hand, in this modification, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to output a signal that causes the pachinko machine 10 to stop and start the supply of the balls to the island facility that supplies the balls to the pachinko machine 10. And it controls so that a ball is hard to be supplied from the island equipment side at the end of the big hit, and the prize ball is continuously paid out during the pseudo-interval effect after the big hit. Thereby, like the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the player's consciousness can be directed to paying out a prize ball during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's consciousness from being concentrated on the pseudo-interval effect, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot ends. In addition, even if the jackpot does not win after the pseudo-interval effect, the player can be immersed in the reverberation of the previous jackpot by continuously paying out the prize ball, and disappointed that the jackpot did not continue The feeling can be reduced.

  The difference between the pachinko machine in this modified example and the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is that the external output terminal plate 261 is electrically connected to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. In the main controller 110, the ROM 202 is provided with a ball supply setting table 202h instead of the payout speed selection table 202g, and the RAM 203 is provided with a supply stop flag 203o, a stop period counter 203p, and a supply period counter 203q. Is added, and some processes included in the main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are different. Other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the fifth embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification. As shown in FIG. 85, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, an external output terminal 261 is provided in addition to the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment. The external output terminal 261 is electrically connected to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111, and is used to output various information related to the pachinko machine 10 to the outside. Here, the various information regarding the pachinko machine 10 includes information indicating whether or not the gaming machine is a big hit, information indicating whether or not the special symbol is changing, information indicating the number of payout balls, The information etc. which show whether supply of these are required are mentioned. These pieces of information are output to an island facility, a hall computer, or the like via the external output terminal 261.

  The hall computer is configured to be able to grasp the ball-out rate of the pachinko machine 10 based on information output via the external output terminal 261 and to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is fraudulent. Further, the island facility supplies the ball to the pachinko machine 10 or stops supplying the ball based on the information output via the external output terminal 261. The pachinko machine 10 itself is also provided with a tank for storing balls. However, since the number of balls that can be stored is small (for example, 150), the big hit starts when the tank is full. Even if it is made, the ball stored in the tank in the middle of the big hit is configured to be used up. Therefore, at least from the middle of the jackpot, it is configured such that all prize balls in the jackpot can be paid out by receiving supply of additional balls from the island facility.

  Next, the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the ROM 202 in this modified example is provided with a ball supply setting table 202h instead of the payout speed selection table 202g defined in the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 87, the ball supply setting table 202h is a data table that is referred to in order to set the supply state of the spheres from the island facilities in each jackpot. By referring to this ball supply setting table 202h, the winning ball payout speed can be made slower in the latter half of the jackpot. Therefore, the payout of the winning ball during the jackpot is continued even after the jackpot ends (that is, during the pseudo-interval effect), so that the player's consciousness can be directed to paying out the winning ball during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's consciousness from being concentrated on the pseudo-interval effect, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot ends.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 86 (b), the RAM 203 in this modification is provided with a supply stop flag 203o, a stop period counter 203p, and a supply period counter 203q in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment. .

  The supply stop flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not the supply of the sphere from the island facility is stopped. If the supply stop flag 203o is off, the supply of the sphere to the island facility is stopped. It shows that. The supply stop flag 203o is switched on and off at a time interval determined for each jackpot round. It is also set to on at the start of the jackpot.

  The stop period counter 203p is a counter that counts the stop period when the supply of balls to the island facility is stopped. In this modification, the supply stop state is maintained for one second after the stop of supply of the sphere is instructed (that is, supply permission is not set). The stop period counter 203p is set to an initial value (250) at a time interval determined for each jackpot round, and is incremented by 1 until the value becomes 0 each time the main process (see FIG. 88) is performed. It is configured.

  The supply period counter 203q is a counter that counts the permission period when the supply of the sphere is permitted to the island facility. In this modification, the supply of the sphere is permitted for a time determined for each round after the start of the jackpot round or after the stop of the supply of the sphere is cancelled. The supply period counter 203q is set with a value corresponding to the time specified in the above-described sphere supply setting table 202h (see FIG. 87) as an initial value every time when the supply of the sphere is permitted.

  Next, the sphere supply setting table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the sphere supply setting table 202h is a data table for setting the frequency at which supply of spheres from the island facility is stopped in each jackpot round. As shown in FIG. 87, in the sphere supply setting table 202h, the frequency of stopping the supply of the sphere is defined in association with the value of the payout counter 203n (that is, in association with the number of big hit rounds).

  Specifically, when the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (that is, the first round), the island facility is not instructed to stop supplying the balls. For this reason, the balls stored in the tank of the pachinko machine 10 are paid out preferentially. Further, when the value of the payout counter 203n is 1 (that is, the second round), the supply of spheres is stopped once every 10 seconds to the island facility. More specifically, the supply of the sphere is permitted for 9 seconds from the start of the second round, and the supply of the sphere is stopped after 10 seconds to 10 seconds. Thereafter, the supply permission state for 9 seconds and the supply stop state for 1 second are repeated until the end of the round. In this state, the supply amount of the balls supplied from the island facility is set so that the actual payout is delayed with respect to the award ball payout request.

  When the value of the payout counter 203n is 2 (that is, the third round), the supply of the sphere is stopped once every 5 seconds to the island facility. More specifically, the supply of the sphere is permitted for 4 seconds from the start of the third round, and the supply of the sphere is stopped for 4 seconds to 5 seconds. Thereafter, the supply permission state for 4 seconds and the supply stop state for 1 second are repeated until the end of the round. Furthermore, when the value of the payout counter 203n is 3 to 14 (that is, the 4th to 15th rounds), the supply of the balls is stopped once every 2 seconds to the island facility. More specifically, the supply of the sphere is permitted for 1 second from the start of each round, and the supply of the sphere is stopped for 1 second to 2 seconds. Thereafter, the supply permission state for 1 second and the supply stop state for 1 second are repeated until the end of each round.

  By referring to this payout counter 203n, by setting the supply permission state and the supply stop state, the frequency of stopping the supply of balls to the island facility can be increased as the number of jackpot rounds increases. it can. That is, it becomes easy for a state where there are not enough balls to be paid out, and the payout of the prize balls can be easily interrupted. Therefore, as the jackpot round progresses, the period from the start of payout of the prize ball to the completion of the payout can be extended. You can keep it out. Therefore, by directing the player's consciousness toward paying out the prize ball during the pseudo-interval production, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval production. It is difficult to distinguish the pseudo-interval effect after the end.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 88 and FIG. 89, various processes executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 in the modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this modification. This main process is a process for executing the main control of the game at a cycle of 4 ms as described above.

  Among the main processes, the processes of S1101 to S1103, S1105 to S1116, and S1142 are the same as the processes of S1101 to S1103, S1105 to S1116, and S1142 in the main process (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. The process is executed. In the main process in this modification, a ball supply setting process (S1151) is executed instead of the payout command setting process (see FIG. 79) in the fifth embodiment. The ball supply setting process is a process for setting a supply of a sphere to the island facility or a stop of the supply of the sphere in each jackpot round. Details of the ball supply setting process (S1151) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the above-described sphere supply setting process will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ball supply setting process is a process for setting supply of a sphere to the island facility or stop of supply of the sphere in each jackpot round. Note that the instruction content for the island facility set in the ball supply setting process is output to the island facility via the external output terminal board 261.

  In the ball supply setting process (see FIG. 89), first, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is made (S4701). If it is decided that the big hit is not made (S4701: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the present is a big hit (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (that is, the first round of the big hit). (S4702). When it is determined that the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (S4702: Yes), it is not necessary to set the stop of the supply of the sphere to the island facility, and thus the present process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4702 that the value of the payout counter 203n is not 0 (that is, 1 to 14), it is then determined whether or not the supply stop flag is on (S4703). When it is determined that the supply stop flag is on (S4703), it means that the supply of the sphere from the island facility is in a stopped state, so by subtracting 1 from the value of the stop period counter 203p, The value is updated (S4704), and it is determined whether the value of the updated stop period counter 203p is 0 (that is, whether the period for stopping the supply of the sphere from the island facility has elapsed) (S4705).

  In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the value of the stop period counter 203p is not 0, it means that 1 second, which is the period for stopping the supply of the sphere from the island facility, has not elapsed, so this process is directly performed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that the value of the stop period counter 203p is 0, supply permission is set in order to resume supply of the ball to the island facility (S4706). Next, an initial value is set in the supply period counter 203q with reference to the value of the payout counter 203n and the ball supply setting table 202h (S4707). Then, the supply stop flag 203o is set to OFF (S4708), and this process ends. The initial value set in the supply period counter 203q is a value corresponding to the permission period defined in the sphere supply setting table 202h. For example, if the value of the payout counter 203n is 1, since the permission period is 9 seconds, 2250 which is a counter value corresponding to 9 seconds is set.

  In the process of S4703, when it is determined that the supply stop flag 203o is off (S4703: No), it indicates that the supply of the ball to the island facility is currently permitted, so the supply period counter The value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of 203q (S4709), and the value of the updated supply period counter 203q is 0 (that is, whether the period for allowing the supply of the sphere from the island facility has elapsed) It is determined whether or not (S4710).

  In the process of S4710, if it is determined that the value of the supply period counter 203q is not 0 (S4710: No), it means that the period for permitting the supply of the ball to the island facility has not elapsed, The process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4710, when it is determined that the value of the supply period counter 203q is 0 (S4710: Yes), supply stop for stopping supply of the sphere to the island facility is set (S4711). Next, 250 (1 second ÷ 4 ms) corresponding to 1 second is set to the value of the stop period counter 203p (S4712), the supply stop flag 203o is set to ON (S4713), and this process is terminated. To do.

  The supply permission or supply stop of the sphere set by the sphere supply setting process (see FIG. 89) is output to the island facility via the external output terminal 261. The island facility supplies the sphere based on an instruction from each pachinko machine 10 electrically connected via the external output terminal 261.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification is configured such that the frequency of stopping the supply of the sphere to the island facility that supplies the sphere increases as the jackpot round progresses. That is, it becomes easy for a state where there are not enough balls to be paid out, and the payout of the winning ball is easily interrupted. Therefore, as the jackpot round progresses, the period from the start of payout of the prize ball to the completion of the payout can be extended. You can keep it out. Therefore, by directing the player's consciousness toward paying out the prize ball during the pseudo-interval production, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval production. It is difficult to distinguish the pseudo-interval effect after the end.

  In this modification, the period during which the prize balls are paid out is varied by varying the frequency of the supply stop of the balls, but the period during which the prize balls are dispensed is varied by varying the supply stop period of the balls. You may comprise as follows. For example, the ball supply stop period may be increased by 1 second as the round progresses. As a result, as in the present modification, the period during which the winning ball is paid out can be lengthened in the latter half of the jackpot. Therefore, since the prize ball can be continuously paid out during the pseudo-interval effect, the player's consciousness can be directed to the prize ball. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's consciousness from being concentrated on the pseudo-interval effect, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the interval effect during the jackpot from the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot ends.

  In this modified example, the supply stop frequency of the sphere is increased every round until the third round, and the supply stop frequency of the sphere is set highest after the third round. It is not something that can be done. For example, at the start of each round, it may be configured to execute a lottery to increase or decrease the supply stop frequency of the ball, and the supply stop frequency may be changed at random. Moreover, you may comprise so that the supply stop frequency of a ball | bowl may be increased / decreased according to the number of rounds. For example, if “big hit D (15 round big hit)” with a large number of rounds continues, most of the prize balls are paid out with the highest frequency of supply of the balls. For this reason, even after the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect are finished and the normal variation pattern effect is executed, the payout of the prize ball may be continuously executed. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy that there is a problem in the payout control of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, for example, in the fifth to twelfth rounds of “big hit D”, the supply of spheres is not stopped, and in the thirteenth to fifteenth rounds, the supply stop frequency of the spheres is increased again step by step You may comprise as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the payout of the prize ball from being continuously executed even after the normal variation pattern effect is executed. Therefore, it can suppress making a player misidentify that the malfunction occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the frequency of the supply stop of the sphere is increased with the start of each jackpot round, but the trigger for changing the frequency of the supply stop of the sphere is not limited to this. For example, in each round, the frequency of stopping the supply of the sphere may be varied based on the number of times that the sphere has won the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. For example, when the ball has won the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a for the first time to the seventh time, it is configured so that the supply stop of the ball is not set. ) When winning 65a, the ball supply is stopped once every 10 seconds, and when the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a for the 9th time, 1 is given every 5 seconds. If the ball supply is stopped at a frequency of once and the ball is awarded to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a for the tenth time, the supply of the ball is stopped at a frequency of once every 2 seconds. You may comprise. As a result, in one round period, the supply of the sphere is frequently stopped in the second half of the period. Therefore, the payout speed is slowed down, so that the winning ball can be paid out during the interval period after the end of each round or during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to paying out the prize ball during the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's consciousness from being concentrated on the pseudo-interval effect, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect that is executed during the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot ends. In addition, even if the jackpot does not win after the pseudo-interval effect, the player can be immersed in the reverberation of the previous jackpot by continuously paying out the prize ball, and disappointed that the jackpot did not continue The feeling can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all the jackpots are configured so that the frequency of the supply of spheres is increased as the round progresses uniformly. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if prefetching is performed during a big hit and it is determined that the lottery result that is a big win is held, the supply of balls will be stopped more frequently, and the prize ball will be paid out during the pseudo-interval production after the big hit. You may comprise so that it may continue. As a result, the player's consciousness can be directed toward paying out the winning ball in the pseudo-interval effect that is executed between the current jackpot and the next jackpot, so that the player is aware that the jackpot has once ended. Can be hard to notice. Therefore, since the jackpot can be felt as continuing for a long time, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. On the contrary, in the look-ahead in the jackpot, while the lottery result that is a big hit is not held, the frequency of stopping the supply of balls is increased every time the round progresses, If determined, the supply of the sphere may not be stopped. If the lottery result that is a big hit during the jackpot is not held, there is a possibility that the end of the jackpot will be notified as a result of the pseudo-interval effect. In this case, by increasing the frequency of stopping the supply of balls, the payout speed of the prize balls will be slowed down so that the prize balls will continue to be paid out even after the end of the jackpot is notified. It is possible to immerse yourself in the reverberation of the previous jackpot and reduce the disappointment that the jackpot did not continue. On the other hand, when the big hit is made again via the pseudo-interval effect, a lot of prize balls are paid out even at the next big hit, so the time required for paying out the prize balls may be prolonged. In other words, there is a possibility that the payout of the prize ball may continue to be executed for a long time after repeating the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect (that is, during the execution of the normal variation pattern effect). There is a risk of misunderstanding that the machine 10 has malfunctioned. Therefore, when it is determined that the lottery result that is a big hit is held, the supply of balls is not set to be stopped so that payout of prize balls is executed endlessly during the execution of the normal variation pattern effect. It can be suppressed from continuing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from misidentifying that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem.

  In the present modification, the various processes performed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 are configured to execute the same process as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. However, for example, the tank has no ball. In such a case, the retry process may not be performed. In this variation, the ball supply from the island facility is adjusted so that the number of balls to be paid out is insufficient. Therefore, it is useless to perform the retry process every time there is a shortage of balls. That's why.

  In this modification, the award balls are sequentially paid out when the balls to be paid out are supplied from the island facility. It may be configured. For example, the payout may be suspended until a total of 150 balls are supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and prize balls may be paid out collectively when 150 balls are supplied. As a result, it is possible to enter into an inflection in the way the items are paid out, so that the player can be entertained. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may pay out based on a predetermined | prescribed opportunity for the payment | payout hold | maintained. The predetermined trigger includes, for example, the timing at which the symbol is fixedly displayed in the variation pattern effect that is first executed after the end of the jackpot, the timing at which the first winning prize is received after the end of the jackpot, and the like.

  Further, in this modified example, the example in which the frequency of the supply stop of the ball is changed for the pachinko machine 10 that performs the pseudo-interval effect has been described. You may comprise so that the frequency of supply stop of this may be varied. Specifically, as the number of jackpot rounds progresses, the supply of balls may be stopped more frequently so that the award ball is paid out for a certain period after the jackpot ends. As a result, the player can be immersed in the last jackpot reverberation, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91. In this modification, the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed with respect to the first embodiment. Specifically, when a winning information command is received, it is determined whether the fluctuation is a fluctuation that is executed beyond the special fluctuation period. Executed. In the special effect, an effect that prompts the user to press the button shown in FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 90, the command determination process in this modification is demonstrated. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing command determination processing of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification. Among these command determination processes, the processes of S1601 to S1608 and the processes of S1610 to S1620 are the processes of S1601 to S1608 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and the processes of S1610 to S1620, respectively. The same processing as each processing is executed. In the command determination process (see FIG. 90) of this modification, when it is determined that a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1608), a prefetch time setting process is then executed (S1650). The process ends. The prefetch time setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the prefetch time setting process (S1650) executed in the process of S1650 of the command determination process (FIG. 90). In the look-ahead time setting process (FIG. 91, S1650), first, based on the winning information command received from the main controller 110, the changing time of the changing pattern effect is calculated, and the calculated changing time is transferred to the winning information storage area 223a. Store (S1651). And it is discriminate | determined whether the fluctuation pattern effect continues until the period more than the period set as a special fluctuation period (S1652), and when it determines with complete | finishing in a special fluctuation period (S1652: No), it is as it is. This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation exceeds the special variation period (S1652: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result indicated by the received winning command is a big hit (S1653). And when it determines with it being a jackpot lottery result (S1653: Yes), a door effect is set with respect to each fluctuation | variation to the jackpot fluctuation (S1654). Specifically, an effect is set in which a boy discovers a new door each time a change is made. In addition, a plurality of modes may be provided for the door to be discovered. For example, when the jackpot continues, a golden luxury door is easily configured, and when the jackpot does not continue, a simple tree is used. The door may be configured to be easy to find.

  When the processing of S1654 is finished, then, a continuous hit effect that is an effect that opens the door by executing the pressing of the frame button 22 from the change pattern effect before the change that becomes a big hit to the change pattern effect that becomes a big win is set. (S1655). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22, the door is opened, and an effect that makes the player feel that the jackpot game is continuing is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S1653 that the result is a lottery result (S1653: No), an effect counter (any of 0 to 198) is acquired (S1656), and a special effect lottery is executed. (S1657). In the special effect lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired effect counter is 0 to 39.

  When it is determined that the special effect lottery is won (S1657: Yes), a period until the change of the effect corresponding to the received winning command is completed is set, and the door effect is set (S1658). Here, an effect in which the doors appear continuously is executed in response to the change display of the special symbol established before the corresponding holding ball won in the special effect lottery. Then, an effect that suggests the occurrence of repeated hitting effects that prompt the user to press the frame button 22 across a plurality of variations (pre-attack notice effect for repeated hitting) is set (S1658). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, the effect is executed in a period spanning a plurality of fluctuations according to the result of executing the pre-reading, so that even if a plurality of fluctuations are actually straddled, it is difficult for the player to understand the boundary of the fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol is changed during the special variation period, and to make the player think as if multiple jackpots are one jackpot effect. .

  Thus, in this modification, when the special effect period is exceeded, a lottery is executed as to whether or not a continuous hit effect that is a special effect is executed. Furthermore, if the result of the determination is a win, a special effect is forcibly set. Therefore, if the special effect is displayed, the player will play a game with expectation that the jackpot will continue. It can be carried out. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the player from getting bored of the game. In addition, by executing the pre-reading process, it is possible to set a special effect period based on the lottery result before the start of change, and it is possible to execute an effect of continuing the big hit game.

  Therefore, the player can feel that the jackpot period continues for a long time, and can enjoy the improvement of the interest of the game. Moreover, in this embodiment, it was comprised so that a jackpot might be continued for a player by performing a door production | presentation with respect to a some fluctuation | variation, and a door production | presentation being set continuously several times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute an effect that counts down the period until the continuous impact effect is started.

  In each of the embodiments described above, an effect of opening the door (see FIGS. 18A and 18B) is made every jackpot interval period, but an effect of opening the door (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). ) An interval period for executing and an interval period for executing an effect different from the effect of opening the door may be provided. That is, you may comprise so that the production | generation of the aspect different from a pseudo | interval production may be performed in an interval period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is during the jackpot interval at the time when an effect of a different aspect occurs. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the next round starts after the end of the effect before the end of the effect, so it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the jackpot will continue.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the pseudo-interval effect is performed in the total period of the special variation period after the jackpot and the jackpot opening period won during the special variation period, but this is not a limitation. . For example, the jackpot opening period may not be provided, and the pseudo-interval effect may be completed in a special variation period after the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the effect period of the jackpot interval effect and the pseudo-interval effect, so it is possible to shorten the round interval. Therefore, it is possible to increase the rate of increase of winning balls to be acquired. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides an opening period only in the jackpot elected without passing through a pseudo interval effect, and does not provide an opening period in the jackpot won through a pseudo interval effect. As a result, in the jackpot that has been won first, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of expectation that a jackpot will start from now on due to the opening effect that is performed during the opening period. Also, an opening period and an ending period may be provided for the jackpot, and the pseudo-interval effect may be executed during these periods. Moreover, you may comprise so that these periods may be changed according to the content etc. of a pseudo interval effect. Thereby, since the production period can be set according to the contents of the pseudo-interval production, etc., it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a deviation between the production period and the production content. it can.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the number of rounds is displayed during the jackpot, but the number of rounds may not be displayed. This configuration makes it harder to understand how many jackpot rounds will be awarded, so the player can expect that he will not know how long the jackpot will last. A game can be performed. Further, in this case, when the end display of the pseudo interval effect is performed, the total number of rounds consumed by the player while the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect are repeated may be displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can recognize the number of rounds that have been digested, so if a large number of rounds are displayed, the player can be satisfied and the number of rounds can be reduced. If displayed, the game can be performed with the goal of acquiring a larger number of rounds in the next jackpot game.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Adjust the duration of the pseudo-interval effect after the jackpot to the interval effect during the jackpot)
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, a privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privileged game state advantageous to the player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, and a predetermined by the ball entering Opening and closing to set the value of the value, and an opening state that sets the opening state in which the ball can enter and the closed state in which the ball entry is restricted as the state of the entrance in 1 Dynamic setting of setting information, closing period setting means for setting a closing period, which is a period for setting the entrance position to the closed state by the opening / closing setting means, and identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means Dynamic display executing means for executing, and execution period setting means for setting an execution period of dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means, wherein the execution period setting means is the privilege gaming state After the When the dynamic display of the identification information, which is the specific lottery result, is executed during a predetermined period, the identification is performed after a period of the same length as the closed period elapses after the privilege gaming state ends. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the execution period can be set so that the dynamic display of information ends.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, the state is shifted to a privileged game state advantageous to the player by the privileged game transition unit. When a ball enters the entrance, a predetermined valuable value is given, and the entrance is opened and closed between an open state where the ball can enter and a closed state where the entrance of the ball is restricted The closed period setting means sets a closing period, which is a period set by the setting means in one privilege game state, and the opening and closing setting means sets the entrance position to the closed state. The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means. And when performing the dynamic display of the identification information which becomes a specific lottery result in a predetermined period after the award gaming state ends, a period of the same length as the closing period after the award gaming state ends. The execution period is set by the execution period setting means so that the dynamic display of the identification information is completed by the time elapses.

  Thereby, when it becomes a specific lottery result in a predetermined period after the privilege gaming state ends, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the privilege gaming state has ended. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged gaming state continues for a longer time, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is provided with suggestion effect execution means for executing a closed period suggestion effect that suggests that the closed period is in the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, a closing period suggesting effect that suggests that it is a closing period in a predetermined period is executed by the suggestion effect executing means, so that after the bonus gaming state is ended During the predetermined period of time, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the privilege gaming state has ended. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged gaming state continues for a longer time, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A2, the execution period setting means executes the dynamic display of the identification information previously set in the predetermined period when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set in the predetermined period. A gaming machine A3 that sets an execution period that is equal to or less than the period.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means in the predetermined period, the identification information set last time in the predetermined period Since the execution period having a length equal to or shorter than the execution period of the dynamic display is set, the dynamic display of the identification information of the shorter execution period is executed in the latter half of the predetermined period. Therefore, since more predetermined lotteries are executed in the latter half of the predetermined period, a specific lottery result is obtained within the predetermined period, and when the state shifts to the award gaming state, the second half of the predetermined period is transferred. It becomes easy. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the time until the next special gaming state is started to be varied, so that the player can hardly recognize that the special gaming state has ended.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information up to a predetermined number of times in the predetermined period, and the dynamic display of the identification information of the predetermined number of times. Among them, when the last dynamic display of the identification information is executed, the dynamic display of the identification information is terminated based on the elapse of a period having the same length as the closed period. A gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display execution determination means executes the dynamic display of the identification information up to a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period. In addition, among the dynamic display of the identification information of a predetermined number of times, when the dynamic display execution unit executes the dynamic display of the last identification information, the period of the same length as the closed period elapses. The dynamic display of identification information is terminated.

  As a result, the period for executing the closing period suggesting effect is set to be the same length as the closing period, so that the closing period suggesting effect is executed after the bonus game state is ended. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the game is being played. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel that the bonus game state is in progress even after the bonus game state has ended, it is possible to make the player feel that the bonus game state has continued for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A4, when the execution period setting means sets the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result in the predetermined period, the execution period setting unit corresponds to a period having the same length as the closing period. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the remaining period is set as an execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A4, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is set by the execution period setting means in the predetermined period, Since the remaining period for the period of the same length is set as an execution period of dynamic display of identification information, whether it is a closed period or a special gaming state regardless of whether a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined period It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the closing period suggesting effect is being executed. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel that the bonus game state is in progress even after the bonus game state has ended, it is possible to make the player feel that the bonus game state has continued for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In either the gaming machine A4 or A5, the execution period setting means sets the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information in the predetermined period based on the remaining number of times relative to the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine A4 or A5, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means in the predetermined period, the remaining for the predetermined number of times Since the execution period of the dynamic display is set based on the number of times, the length of the closed period suggesting effect can be made difficult to vary. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the closed period or the bonus game state has ended and the closed period suggesting effect is being executed.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the execution period setting means has the same length as the closed period when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set in the same length as the closed period. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that it is set based on the remaining time until the time period elapses.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means in the period having the same length as the closed period Since the execution period is set based on the remaining time until the period of the same length as the closed period elapses, the length of the closed period suggesting effect can be made difficult to vary. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the closed period or the bonus game state has ended and the closed period suggesting effect is being executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the closing period setting means selects one period from a plurality of periods having different lengths and sets it as the closing period.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the closing period setting means selects one period from a plurality of periods having different lengths and sets it as the closing period. The length can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the closed period or the bonus game state has ended and the closed period suggesting effect is being executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, when the specific lottery result is not obtained in the lottery executed by the lottery means until the period of the same length as the one closed period ends, the privilege game A gaming machine A9 comprising an end notification means for notifying that the state has ended.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the lottery executed by the lottery means until the period of the same length as the one closed period ends becomes a specific lottery result. If not, the end notification means notifies the end of the privilege gaming state, so that the player can recognize that the privilege gaming state has ended.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the dynamic display executing means, when executing the dynamic display of the identification information in a period of the same length as the closed period, displays the identification information on the player's line of sight. A gaming machine A10 that is dynamically displayed at a position off the center.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display executing means in the period having the same length as the closed period, Since the information by time is dynamically displayed at a position where the information deviates from the center of the player's line of sight, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the closed period or the bonus game state has ended and the closed period suggesting effect is being executed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the privilege game state has a plurality of types in which the number of times of the open state set by the opening / closing setting unit is different from each other, and The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that when a specific lottery result is obtained by means, one type is selected and set from among the plurality of types of the privilege gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are produced. That is, the privilege game state has a plurality of types with different numbers of open states set by the open / close setting means. When a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, one type is selected and set by the privilege game transition means from among a plurality of types of privilege game states.

  This makes it difficult to predict how many times the open state is set in the privilege gaming state. Therefore, when the open state is set a plurality of times, whether the open state is set a plurality of times in one privilege game state, or a plurality of open states are caused by a continuous transition to a plurality of privilege game states. It can be difficult to distinguish whether it has been set. Accordingly, the game can be executed while expecting that many open states are set, and there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Feature B group> (The same effect as the interval effect is executed after the big hit)
Effect execution means for executing effects, lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privileged game state advantageous to the player when the lottery means results in a specific lottery result; , The entrance to which a predetermined valuable value is given by entering the ball, and the state of the entrance, an open state where the ball can enter and a closed state where the entrance of the ball is restricted The opening / closing setting means for setting in the one privilege gaming state, and the closing period setting means for setting a closing period that is a period for setting the entrance position to the closed state by the opening / closing setting means. The means displays the same image as the closed period image, which is an image displayed in the effect executed in the closed period, in the effect executed in the predetermined period after the privilege gaming state ends. Gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine B1 has the following effects. That is, the effect is executed by the effect execution means. Further, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the privilege game transition means shifts to a privilege game state advantageous to the player. When a ball enters the entrance, a predetermined valuable value is given, and the entrance is opened and closed between an open state where the ball can enter and a closed state where the entrance of the ball is restricted The closed period setting means sets a closing period, which is a period set by the setting means in one privilege game state, and the opening and closing setting means sets the entrance position to the closed state. In the effect executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended, the same image as the closed period image displayed in the effect executed in the closed period is displayed.

  Thereby, it can be made to feel as if the privilege game state continues during the predetermined period after the privilege game state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make it feel as if the privileged gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a longer period of time, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine B1, the bonus game state has a plurality of types in which the number of times of the open state set by the opening / closing setting unit is different from each other, and the bonus game transition unit is specified by the lottery unit. A gaming machine B2 that is configured to select and set one type from among the plurality of types of the bonus gaming state when a lottery result is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1, the privilege gaming state has a plurality of types in which the number of open states set by the opening / closing setting unit is different from each other, and a specific lottery result by the lottery unit Since the one type is selected and set from among a plurality of types of special game states by the special game transition means, the number of open states to be set is predicted when the special game state is entered. Can be difficult. Further, since the closed period image is displayed in a predetermined period, when the open period is set a plurality of times, whether the open period is one privilege gaming state or a specific lottery result in the predetermined period, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the open period has been set a plurality of times as a result of shifting to the gaming state a plurality of times. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game in the bonus game state while expecting that many open periods are set, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, period determining means for determining whether or not a period having the same length as the closing period has elapsed after the bonus gaming state has ended, and the same length as the closing period by the period determining means A gaming machine B3, comprising: an end suggestion effect execution means for executing an end suggestion effect that suggests the end of the privilege gaming state when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, whether or not a period of the same length as the closing period has elapsed after the bonus gaming state has ended is determined by the period determining means, and the closing period When it is determined that a period of the same length has elapsed, an end suggestion effect that suggests the end of the reward game state is executed by the end suggestion effect execution means, so that the reward game state has ended for the player There is an effect that can be recognized.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the closed period image is displayed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is the closed period image. A gaming machine B4 that is executed in a manner that is less visible than

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the closed period image is displayed by the effect execution means, the dynamic of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means Since the display is executed in a manner that is less visible compared to the closed period image, it may be difficult for the player to distinguish between the closed period or the predetermined period after the bonus gaming state ends. There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine B4, display means capable of displaying one or both of a pre-close period image displayed by the effect executing means and a dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means on a display screen. And when the display means displays the closed period image and the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is displayed in a narrower range than the closed period image. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, one or both of the closed period image displayed by the effect executing means and the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means are displayed on the display screen by the display means. When the closed period image and the dynamic display of identification information are displayed on the display means, the dynamic display of the identification information is displayed in a narrower range than the closed period image.

  Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the closed period and the predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended.

  In the gaming machine B4, when the closed period image is displayed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is a mode in which the identification information is translucent. A gaming machine B6, which is displayed as

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4, when the pseudo pause suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means when the identification information is half. Since it is displayed in a transparent manner, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the closed period and the predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6 includes a pseudo dynamic display execution means for performing dynamic display of identification information in a pseudo manner during the grant suspension period.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the pseudo-dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the pseudo identification information in the closed period, so that it is the closed period. In addition, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the predetermined period after the bonus game state ends.

<Characteristic C group> (The display mode of the pseudo-interval effect is determined based on the look-ahead result)
Effect execution means for executing effects, lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privileged game state advantageous to the player when the lottery means results in a specific lottery result; , The entrance to which a predetermined valuable value is given by entering the ball, and the state of the entrance, an open state where the ball can enter and a closed state where the entrance of the ball is restricted 1 open / close setting means for setting in the privilege gaming state, closed period setting means for setting a closing period that is a period for setting the entrance position to the closed state by the open / close setting means, and lottery by the lottery means Dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on the result, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and stored in the storage means Said information And a preliminary lottery means for executing the predetermined lottery in advance before the lottery condition is satisfied, and the effect executing means is the closed period in a predetermined period after the bonus gaming state is ended. Execution of a closing period suggesting effect that is an effect that suggests, and when the preliminary lottery means results in the specific lottery result, execution of dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result A gaming machine C1 that executes at least the closing period suggesting effect until the game ends.

  The gaming machine C1 has the following effects. That is, the effect is executed by the effect execution means. A predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition using the information acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. When a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the state is shifted to a privilege game state advantageous to the player by the privilege game transition means. When a ball enters the entrance, a predetermined valuable value is given, and the entrance is opened and closed between an open state where the ball can enter and a closed state where the entrance of the ball is restricted The closed period setting means sets a closing period, which is a period set by the setting means in one privilege game state, and the opening and closing setting means sets the entrance position to the closed state. Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means until the lottery condition is satisfied. A predetermined lottery is executed in advance by the preliminary lottery means before the lottery conditions are established using the information stored in the storage means. Here, in the effect execution means, a closed period suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting that it is the closed period is executed in a predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended, and a specific lottery result is obtained by the prior lottery means. In such a case, at least the closing period suggesting effect is executed until the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is completed.

  As a result, the closing period suggesting effect is executed in the period from the end of the award gaming state to the start of the next award gaming state based on the information indicating the specific lottery result stored in the storage means. Therefore, the privilege gaming state does not end, and it can be felt that one privilege gaming state continues. Therefore, it is possible to make it feel as if the privileged gaming state advantageous to the player has continued for a long time, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine C1, the effect executing means determines that there is information that becomes a predetermined lottery result in the information stored in the storage means by the information determining means during the predetermined period. When the dynamic display of the identification information is executed after the predetermined period is exceeded by the dynamic display execution means, the closed period suggesting effect is extended until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed. A gaming machine C2 including a production extending means for performing.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, it is determined that there is information that is a predetermined lottery result in the information stored in the storage means by the information determining means during a predetermined period. If the dynamic display of the identification information is executed after the predetermined period of time is exceeded by the dynamic display executing means based on the above, the pause suggesting effect is extended by the effect extending means until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed. Therefore, when the length of the pause suggestion effect becomes longer than the predetermined period, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a possibility that the privilege game state will continue. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player more entertaining the pause suggestion effect.

  In the gaming machine C2, during the predetermined period, the information determining unit determines that there is information that is a predetermined lottery result in the information stored in the storage unit, and based on the information, the dynamic determination is performed. When the display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information after the predetermined period is exceeded, the display execution means includes a period determination means for determining in advance a period until the dynamic display of the identification information ends, The effect execution means sets the content of the closed period suggestion effect extended by the effect extension means based on the period determined by the period determination means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, in a predetermined period, it is determined by the information determining means that the information stored in the storage means is information that becomes a predetermined lottery result, and based on the information, the dynamic display executing means exceeds the predetermined period. When the dynamic display of the identification information is executed after that, the period until the dynamic display of the identification information ends is previously determined by the period determination means. Then, based on the period determined by the period determining means, the content of the closed period suggesting effect extended by the effect extending means is set by the effect executing means.

  Thereby, the content of the closing period suggesting effect extended by the effect extending means can be changed according to the period until the dynamic display of the identification information ends. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be suppressed that the closing period suggesting effect is shifted from the start of the special gaming state and the player feels uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the game machine C2 or C3 includes a period determining unit that determines whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed after the bonus gaming state has ended, and the effect executing unit is configured to perform the predetermined period by the period determining unit. A gaming machine C4, comprising: an end suggestion effect executing means for executing an end suggestion effect that suggests the end of the privilege gaming state when it is determined that the time has elapsed.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined by the period determining means whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed after the privilege gaming state has ended. Further, in the effect executing means, when the period determining means determines that the predetermined period has elapsed, the end suggesting effect executing means suggesting the end of the privilege gaming state is executed by the end suggesting effect executing means.

  Thereby, there exists an effect that a player can recognize clearly whether the privilege game state was complete | finished.

  In the gaming machine C4, the effect extension means performs the dynamic of the identification information executed based on the information that becomes the predetermined lottery result after the end suggestion effect executed by the end suggestion effect execution means ends. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the closing period suggesting effect is executed until the display is completed.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, after the end suggestion effect executed by the end suggestion effect execution means ends, the identification information executed based on the information that becomes a predetermined lottery result Since the closing period suggestion effect is executed by the effect extension means until the dynamic display ends, the player can be made aware that there is still a possibility of entering the privilege gaming state even if the end suggestion effect ends. it can. Therefore, even if the end suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the privileged game state, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the gaming machine C5, when the closing period suggesting effect is executed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is compared with the closing period suggesting effect. The game machine C6 is executed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, when the closing period suggesting effect is executed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is closed. Since it is executed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize compared to the period suggestion effect, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish the period during which the closing period suggestion effect is being executed and the closed period in the privilege gaming state. Therefore, it can be made more interested in whether it becomes a privilege game state after closing period suggestion production. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic D group> (Production is shortened when stop of firing is detected)
An effect executing means for executing effects, a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, and a privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a benefit game state advantageous to the player when the lottery means results in a specific lottery result; , The entrance to which a predetermined valuable value is given by entering the ball, and the state of the entrance, an open state where the ball can enter and a closed state where the entrance of the ball is restricted 1 for opening / closing setting means for setting in the privilege gaming state, closing period setting means for setting a closing period, which is a period for setting the entrance position to the closed state by the opening / closing setting means, and an operation by the player A launching means for launching a ball based on the operation, and an operation determining means for determining the content of the operation on the launching means, wherein the effect executing means is configured to close the closing during a predetermined period after the privilege gaming state ends. Suggests a period A closing period suggesting effect that is an effect to be performed, and when the operation determining means determines that the result is a predetermined determination result, it includes an effect variable means for changing the content of the closing period suggesting effect. A gaming machine D1.

  The gaming machine D1 has the following effects. That is, when an effect is executed by the effect execution means and a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the privilege game transition means shifts to a privilege game state advantageous to the player. Then, a predetermined valuable value is given by entering the ball into the entrance, and as the state of the entrance, an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the entrance of the ball is restricted Is set in one privilege game state by the opening / closing setting means, and the closing period setting means sets a closing period, which is a period in which the state of the entrance is closed. Based on the operation by the player, the content of the operation for the launching means for firing the ball is determined by the operation determining means. In the effect execution means, a closed period suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting that it is a closed period is executed after the award gaming state has ended, and a pseudo judgment is made when the operation determination means determines that the result is a predetermined determination result. The content of the pause suggesting effect is varied by the effect varying means.

  Thereby, since the effect according to the player's operation on the launching means can be executed, the closing period suggesting effect can be varied according to the player's preference. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the effect changing means changes the content of the closing period suggesting effect to the content suggesting the end of the privilege gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the content of the closing period suggesting effect is changed to the content suggesting the end of the privilege gaming state by the effect varying means, so that the privilege gaming state has ended. Can be recognized by the player. Therefore, the player can recognize that the game can be interrupted and can take a break or the like. Therefore, there is an effect that a game with sharpness can be performed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and whether the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display executing means. Dynamic display execution determining means for determining whether or not the effect variable means is determined to be a predetermined determination result by the operation determining means, and the dynamic display execution determining means dynamically The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, when it is determined that the display is not executed, the content of the closing period suggesting effect is varied.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the dynamic display execution determines whether the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information. Discriminated by the discriminating means. Then, in the effect variable means, when it is determined that the predetermined determination result is obtained by the operation determining means, and the dynamic display execution determining means determines that the dynamic display of the identification information is not executed, the closing period suggesting effect The contents of are variable.

  Thereby, the player who has confirmed that the content of the closing period suggesting effect has been changed can be made to recognize that the privilege gaming state has ended. Therefore, the player can recognize that the game can be interrupted and can take a break or the like. Therefore, there is an effect that a game with sharpness can be performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the content changing means changes the content of the closing period suggesting effect, the closing period suggesting effect of the closing period suggesting effect after the variable is changed. A gaming machine D4, the content of which is variable so as to be shorter than the performance period.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the content of the closing period suggesting effect is varied by the effect varying means, the effect period of the closing period suggesting effect after the variable is variable Since the contents are varied so as to be shorter than the previous closed period suggesting effect period, it can be recognized earlier that the game can be interrupted. Therefore, there is an effect that a sharp game can be performed.

  In the gaming machine D4, the effect execution means terminates suggesting the end of the privilege gaming state when the lottery means does not achieve a predetermined lottery result by a predetermined period after the privilege gaming state ends. When the content of the closing period suggesting effect is changed, the effect changing means is configured to change the content of the closing period suggesting effect to the content of the end suggesting effect. Characteristic gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4, if the predetermined lottery result is not reached by a predetermined period after the bonus gaming state ends, an end suggestion indicating the end of the bonus gaming state The production is executed by the production execution means. Then, when the content of the closing period suggesting effect is varied by the effect varying means, the content of the closing period suggesting effect is varied to the content of the end suggesting effect.

  Thereby, since it is possible to suggest to the player that the privilege game state has ended, it is possible to recognize earlier that the game can be interrupted. Therefore, there is an effect that a sharp game can be performed.

  In any one of the gaming machine D1 to the gaming machine D5, when the player determines that the player has not performed an operation for causing the launching unit to launch a ball for a certain period of time, the predetermined determination unit A gaming machine D6, characterized in that it is discriminated as a result of discrimination.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, it is determined that the player has not performed an operation for causing the launching means to launch a ball for a certain period of time. In this case, it is determined by the operation determining means that the result is a predetermined determination result, so that it is suggested to the player earlier that the privileged gaming state has ended, and the player can resume the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine D6, the gaming machine D6 includes operation detecting means for repeatedly detecting at a predetermined cycle whether or not the player is performing an operation for causing the launching means to launch a ball, and the operation determining means includes the operation determining means, A gaming machine D7, wherein when the operation detecting means continuously detects that a player's operation is not performed for a predetermined number of times, the predetermined determination result is determined. .

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D6, whether or not the player is performing an operation for causing the launching means to launch a ball is repeatedly detected by the operation detecting means at a predetermined cycle. When the operation detecting means continuously detects that the player's operation is not performed for a predetermined number of times, the operation determining means determines that the result is a predetermined determination result. There is an effect that it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not an operation is performed.

  In the gaming machine D7, the detection means includes a touch sensor that detects whether or not a player is touching the launching means, and the operation determination means is configured such that the player touches the launching means by the operation detection means. The gaming machine D8 is characterized in that it is determined that the predetermined determination result is obtained when it is continuously detected that it has not been performed a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D7, the gaming machine D8 includes detection means configured by a touch sensor that detects whether or not the player is touching the launching means. Whether or not the player is going to fire a ball because the operation discriminating means determines that it is a predetermined discriminating result when it continuously detects that it has not touched the launching means a predetermined number of times. There is an effect that can be determined more accurately.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the closing period is set to a period with a specific length, and the effect executing means is configured to close the closing period with the same length as the period with the specific length. A gaming machine D9, which executes a period suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the closing period suggesting effect is executed by the effect executing means in the period having the same length as the closing period. It is difficult to distinguish between the execution period and the closed period. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player feel that the privileged gaming state continues for a long time, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic E group> (Easy to reserve special figure 2 during jackpot)
A game in which a ball entrance into which a ball can enter and a game state is set to one of a first state and a second state in which the ball is easier to enter the ball entrance than the first state. A predetermined lottery is performed based on establishment of a lottery condition using the state setting unit, an acquisition unit that acquires information based on a ball entering the entrance, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit The lottery means, the privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privilege gaming state advantageous to the player based on the fact that a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means Storage means capable of storing until a lottery is performed by the means, and the gaming state setting means sets the second state during the privilege gaming state.

  The gaming machine E1 has the following effects. That is, the gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means to either the first state or the second state in which the ball is easier to enter the entrance than the first state. Further, information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the ball entering the entrance. When the lottery condition is satisfied, a special lottery using the acquired information is performed by the lottery means, and a special advantage is obtained for the player by the special game transfer means based on the result of the specific lottery by the lottery means. The state is shifted to the gaming state. And the information acquired by the acquisition means is memorize | stored by a memory | storage means until the lottery by a lottery means is performed. And a 2nd state is set by the game state setting means during a privilege game state.

  Thereby, in the privilege game state, since it is set to a game state in which a ball can easily enter the entrance, information is easily acquired by the acquisition means during the privilege game state. Therefore, since more information is stored in the storage means by the time the privilege gaming state ends, there is an effect that it is possible to easily perform a predetermined lottery after the privilege gaming state ends.

  In the gaming machine E1, a value-added entrance to which a predetermined valuable value is given by entering the ball, and an open state in which the ball can enter and an entrance of the ball as the state of the value-added entrance An opening / closing setting means for setting the closed state in which the value is restricted to one in the privilege gaming state, and a closing period for setting the closing period, which is a period for setting the state of the value-added entrance by the opening / closing setting means to the closed state A period setting means, and an effect execution means for executing a closed period suggesting effect that is an effect that suggests that the closed period is in a predetermined period after the bonus gaming state has ended, the predetermined period Is a period of a length that allows lottery by the lottery means to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, a predetermined valuable value is given by entering the ball into the value-added entrance, and the open state where the ball can enter and the entrance of the ball are restricted as the state of the value-added entrance. The closed state is set by the open / close setting means in one privilege game state, and the open / close setting means sets the closed period, which is the period during which the value-added entrance is closed, by the closed period setting means. A closing period suggesting effect, which is an effect suggesting that the privilege gaming state is the closing period, is set by the effect executing means in a predetermined period after the bonus game state ends. In addition, lottery by lottery means is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period.

  This makes it possible for the player to feel as if the privilege gaming state continues while the closing period suggesting effect is being executed, so that the privilege gaming state continues for a long time. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E2, the storage means is provided with a predetermined upper limit for the number of pieces of information that can be stored, and during the predetermined period, the number of times equal to or more than the predetermined upper limit by the lottery means. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the lottery period is at least long enough to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E2, a predetermined upper limit is provided for the number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage means. Since the number of times of lottery can be executed, a specific lottery result is obtained during execution of the closing period suggesting effect, and the transition to the privilege gaming state can be facilitated. Therefore, the privilege gaming state and the closing period suggesting effect can be easily repeated, so that the player can feel as if the privilege gaming state has continued for a long time. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the entrance has launched a ball aiming at the value entry entrance compared to a case where a player launches a ball without aiming at the value entry entrance. The game machine E4 is characterized in that the ball is provided at a position where the ball is easy to enter.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the ball aiming at the value-added entrance compared to the case where the player launches the ball without aiming at the value-added entrance Since the entrance is provided at the position where the ball is easier to enter, the ball that was launched aiming at the value-added entrance in order to obtain a predetermined game value during the bonus game state It becomes easy to enter the entrance and information is easily acquired by the acquisition means. Therefore, there is an effect that more information can be stored in the storage means during the privilege gaming state.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the gaming state setting means sets the second state when initial setting for the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the initial setting for the gaming machine is executed, the second state is set by the gaming state setting means. It is possible to match the gaming state at and the gaming state set when the initial setting is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the gaming state in the privilege gaming state can be changed to a gaming state according to the gaming rules.

  In the gaming machine E5, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting the first state based on the end of the privilege gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E5, the first state is set by the gaming state setting means based on the end of the privilege gaming state, so that the second state continues and the gaming machine exits. As a result of the increase in the ball percentage, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive stimulation of the player's euphoria.

<Characteristic F group> (varies the payout speed of the winning ball during the big hit)
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, a privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privileged game state advantageous to the player based on a result of a specific lottery by the lottery means, and entry of a ball are permitted The entrance that is set to one of the entrance permission state and the entrance restricted state in which entrance of the ball is restricted, and the state of the entrance are determined as the entrance in the bonus game state. A permission setting means for setting a permission state, a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of valuable objects when a ball enters the entrance, and paying out the valuable objects by the payout means A gaming machine F1 comprising variable means for varying a payout time required.

  The gaming machine F1 has the following effects. That is, based on the fact that the lottery means obtains a specific lottery result, the state is shifted to a privilege game state advantageous to the player by the privilege game transition means. In the privilege gaming state, the state of the entrance is set to an entrance permit state in which entry of the ball is permitted by the permission setting means, and a predetermined number of times predetermined when the ball enters the entrance The valuable object is paid out by the payout means, and the payout time required for paying out the valuable object by the payout means is varied by the variable means.

  As a result, it is possible to inflate the manner in which the valuable object is paid out during the award gaming state, so that the player can be entertained not only by the amount of the valuable object to be paid out, but also by the way it is paid out. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the bonus game state is configured to include a plurality of entrance permission periods, which are periods set in the entrance permission state by the entrance permission means, and the variable means includes one of the benefits Of the plurality of entrance permission periods set in the gaming state, the payout time in the entrance permission period set in the second half is longer than the payout time in the entrance permission period set in the first half. As described above, the gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the payout time is variable.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. In other words, the bonus game state is configured by having a plurality of entrance permission periods, which are periods set in the entrance permission state by the entrance permission means. Further, the variable means is that the payout time in the entrance permission period set in the second half of the plurality of entrance permission periods set in one privilege gaming state is the payout time in the entrance permission period set in the first half. The payout time can be varied to be longer.

  Thereby, it is possible to continue paying out valuable objects even after the privilege gaming state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to immerse the player in the remnant of the special game state while the valuable object is paid out even after the special game state has ended. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F2, the privilege gaming state is set between the plurality of entrance permission periods and the plurality of entrance permission periods, and the state of the entrance is set to the entrance restricted state. A suggestion effect executing means configured to execute a restriction suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting that it is the entrance restriction period after the bonus gaming state is completed. A gaming machine F3 characterized by being provided.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are produced. That is, the privilege gaming state is set between a plurality of entrance permission periods and the plurality of entrance permission periods, and the entrance restriction period which is a period during which the entrance entrance state is set to the entrance restriction state. Consists of. Then, after the bonus game state is ended, a restriction suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting that it is the entry restriction period is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

  Thereby, even after the bonus game state is ended, it is possible to make the player feel as if in the privilege game state while the restriction suggestion effect is being executed. Further, since the provision of the valuable object continues even after the privilege gaming state is ended, the player's consciousness can be directed to the valuable object. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish the period during which the restriction suggestion effect is being executed and the entry restriction period, so that the player feels that the privileged gaming state has continued longer than actual. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the payout means has a motor, and the variable means pays out the predetermined unit number of valuable objects by rotating the motor by a predetermined rotation amount. The game machine F4 is characterized in that the payout time is varied by varying the rotational speed of the motor.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are produced. That is, the payout means has a motor, and a predetermined number of valuable objects are paid out by the motor rotating by a predetermined rotation amount. In the variable means, the payout time is varied by varying the rotational speed of the motor.

  Thus, there is an effect that an arbitrary payout time can be accurately set by electrical control on the motor.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the payout means has a motor, and the motor rotates out a predetermined amount of rotation to pay out the predetermined unit number of valuable objects. A rotation amount determination means for determining whether or not the motor has rotated by a specific rotation amount; and when the rotation amount determination means determines that the motor has rotated by a specific rotation amount, the motor is operated for a predetermined period. A gaming machine F5 comprising stop means for stopping.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are produced. That is, the payout means has a motor, and a predetermined number of valuable objects are paid out by rotating the motor by a predetermined rotation amount. Then, whether or not the motor has rotated by a specific amount of rotation is determined by the rotation amount determination means, and when the rotation amount determination means determines that the motor has rotated by a specific rotation amount, the operation of the motor is stopped. It is stopped for a predetermined period by the means.

  Thereby, even when a large amount of valuable objects are paid out, it is possible to prevent the motor from continuously rotating. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the motor from being heated by a continuous operation and causing a malfunction in the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine F5, the variable means varies the payout time by varying the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, the variable period can be varied and the payout time can be varied by the variable means, so that the rotation speed of the motor can be unified. Therefore, there is an effect that the control on the motor can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine F5, the variable means varies the payout time by varying the specific rotation amount.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, the specific rotation amount is varied by the variable means, and the payout time is variable. Therefore, the payout time is easily controlled by electrical control of the motor. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, storage means for storing regulation information defined in association with the set number of times of the plurality of entrance permission periods set in the bonus gaming state in which the payout time is one The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the variable means varies the payout time based on the regulation information.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, it is defined in association with the set number of times of a plurality of entry permission period information set in a bonus gaming state with a payout time of 1. Since the prescribed information is stored by the storage means, and the payout time is varied by the variable means based on the prescribed information, the payout time can be changed by a simple process of reading and setting the information stored in the storage means. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load due to the variable means can be reduced.

<Characteristic G group> (Send a signal to stop the supply of balls to the island facility)
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, a privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privileged game state advantageous to the player based on a result of a specific lottery by the lottery means, and entry of a ball are permitted The entrance that is set to one of the entrance permission state and the entrance restricted state in which entrance of the ball is restricted, and the state of the entrance are determined as the entrance in the bonus game state. Permission setting means for setting to a permission state, payout means for paying out a predetermined number of valuable objects when a ball enters the entrance, and playing the valuable objects paid out by the payout means Supply instruction means for instructing supply of the valuable object to an external supply means that can be supplied from outside the machine, and the supply instruction means specifies supply of the valuable object based on establishment of a predetermined condition. Before stopping for a period Game machine G1, characterized in that is intended to instruct the external supply means.

  The gaming machine G1 has the following effects. That is, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and based on the result of the lottery means being a specific lottery result, the state is shifted to a privilege game state advantageous to the player by the privilege game transition means. In the privilege game state, the state of the entrance is set to the entrance permission state in which entry of the ball is permitted by the permission setting means. When a ball enters the entrance, a predetermined number of valuable objects are paid out by the payout means, and the external supply means that can supply the valuable objects paid out by the payout means from the outside of the gaming machine On the other hand, supply of valuable objects is instructed by the supply instruction means. Here, the supply instruction means instructs the external supply means to stop the supply of the valuable object for a specific period based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

  As a result, it is possible to inflate the manner in which the valuable object is paid out during the award gaming state, so that the player can be entertained not only by the amount of the valuable object to be paid out, but also by the way it is paid out. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine G1 includes condition setting means for setting a trigger condition that triggers the supply of the valuable object to the external supply means to stop the supply of the valuable object for a specific period by the supply instruction means. The state is configured to include a plurality of entrance permission periods that are periods set in the entrance permission state by the entrance permission means, and the condition setting means includes a plurality of conditions set in the one award gaming state. The trigger condition set in the entrance permission period set in the second half of the entrance permission period is more likely to be satisfied than the trigger condition set in the entrance permission period set in the first half. The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the trigger condition is set in the game machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, the condition setting unit sets an opportunity condition that triggers an external supply unit to stop supplying the valuable object for a specific period. The privilege game state is configured to have a plurality of entrance permission periods, which are periods set in the entrance permission state by the entrance permission means. Among the plurality of entrance permission periods set in one privilege gaming state, the trigger condition set in the entrance permission period set in the first half is the trigger condition set in the entrance permission period set in the second half The trigger condition is set by the condition setting means so as to be more easily established.

  As a result, in the entry permission period set in the second half, the period required for the valuable object to be granted can be lengthened, so that the valuable object can be continuously paid out even after the privilege gaming state is ended. it can. Therefore, it is possible to immerse the player in the remnant of the special game state while the valuable object is paid out even after the special game state has ended. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2, the privilege gaming state is set between the plurality of entrance permission periods and the plurality of entrance permission periods, and the state of the entrance is set to the entrance restricted state. A suggestion effect executing means configured to execute a restriction suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting that it is the entrance restriction period after the bonus gaming state is completed. A gaming machine G3 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the following effects are produced. That is, the bonus game state is set between a plurality of entrance permission periods and the plurality of entrance permission periods, and the entrance restriction period, which is a period during which the entrance entrance state is set to the entrance restriction state, It is comprised. In addition, after the bonus game state is ended, a restriction suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting that it is the entrance restriction period is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

  This makes it possible for the player to feel as if the privilege game state continues even after the privilege game state has ended. Further, since the provision of the valuable object continues even after the privilege gaming state is ended, the player's consciousness can be directed to the valuable object. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish the period during which the restriction suggestion effect is being executed and the entry restriction period, so that the player feels that the privileged gaming state has continued longer than actual. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the condition setting means stops the supply of the valuable object for a specific period at a certain period in the one entry permission period, and in the one special gaming state Of the plurality of entrance permission periods set, the constant period set in the entrance permission period set in the second half is the constant set in the entrance permission period set in the first half. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the fixed period is set to be shorter than the period.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the following effects are produced. That is, in one entry permission period, the supply of the valuable object is stopped for a specific period by the condition setting means at regular intervals. Among a plurality of entrance permission periods set in one privilege gaming state, a certain period set in the entrance permission period set in the second half is a constant set in the entrance permission period set in the first half A certain period is set so as to be shorter than the period.

  As a result, the supply of the valuable object is more likely to be stopped during the entrance permission period set in the second half, so that the time required to apply the valuable object can be lengthened. Therefore, since the valuable object can continue to be paid out even after the award gaming state ends, the award gaming is performed while the valuable object is paid out to the player even after the award gaming state ends. It can be immersed in the reverberation of the state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G4, the gaming machine G4 includes a storage unit that stores regulation information defined in association with a set number of times of the plurality of entrance permission periods set in the one special gaming state. A gaming machine G5, wherein the setting means sets the fixed period based on the regulation information.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, the following effects are produced. In other words, the storage unit stores prescription information that is defined in association with the set number of times of a plurality of entrance permission periods set in a single special gaming state. And a fixed period is set by the condition setting means based on the regulation information.

  Thereby, the condition setting means can set a fixed period by a simple process of selecting a period from the prescribed information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the condition setting means can be reduced.

<Characteristic H group> (Set up an effect that spans multiple variations based on the look-ahead result)
An effect execution means for executing an effect, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the lottery means A special game transition means for shifting the state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a specific lottery result is obtained, and a entrance where a predetermined valuable value is given by entering the ball, As the state of the entrance, an open / close setting unit that sets a pattern of an open state in which a ball can enter and a closed state in which the entrance of the ball is restricted in one of the privilege game states, and the open / close setting unit Closed period setting means for setting a closing period, which is a period for setting the entrance position to the closed state, and dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on a lottery result by the lottery means; , Said get hands Storage means for storing the information acquired by the above until the lottery condition is satisfied, and prior execution of the predetermined lottery before the lottery condition is satisfied using the information stored in the storage means A plurality of pieces of identification information including dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result when the specific lottery result is obtained by the preliminary lottery unit. The game machine H1 is characterized by comprising an effect changing means capable of changing the content of the closing period suggesting effect over the dynamic display of the.

  The gaming machine H1 has the following effects. That is, the effect is executed by the effect execution means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, information is acquired by the acquisition means, and when the information is subjected to a predetermined lottery by the lottery means and a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, The state is shifted to a privilege gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, a predetermined valuable value is given by entering the ball into the entrance, and as the state of the entrance, an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the entrance of the ball is restricted Is set in one privilege gaming state by the opening / closing setting means, and the closing period setting means sets a closing period, which is a period for closing the entrance position. Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means. The information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored until the lottery condition is satisfied by the storage unit, and a predetermined lottery is executed in advance by the preliminary lottery unit before the lottery condition is satisfied using the information stored in the storage unit. The Here, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the preliminary lottery means, the content of the closed period suggesting effect is displayed over a plurality of dynamic display of identification information including a dynamic display of identification information indicating the specific lottery result. It is varied by the effect varying means. Thereby, if the effect is varied by the effect varying means, it is possible to make the player expect a privilege gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means executes a closed period suggesting effect that is an effect suggesting that it is the closed period in a predetermined period after the privilege gaming state ends. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the variable means changes the content of the closing period suggesting effect during the execution of the closing period suggesting effect.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, during the predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended, the inter-trigger suggestion effect that is the suggestion effect indicating the closed period is executed by the effect execution means. During the execution of the closing period suggestion effect, the content of the calm suggestion effect is varied by the effect varying means. Thereby, a some privilege game state can be shown as if it was one privilege game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, a period discriminating unit that discriminates a period until the privilege gaming state is started based on the specific lottery result when the preliminary lottery results in the specific lottery result. And the effect variable means is configured to change the content of the closing period suggesting effect when the period determining means determines that the privilege gaming state is started after the predetermined period is exceeded. Characteristic gaming machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are produced. That is, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the preliminary lottery means, the period until the privilege gaming state is started is determined by the period determination means based on the specific lottery result. In addition, when it is determined by the period determining means that the privilege gaming state is started after a predetermined period is exceeded, the contents of the closed period suggesting effect are changed by the effect changing means. Thereby, when the length of the closing period suggesting effect is lengthened, it can be recognized that the expectation degree of the privileged gaming state is high, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine H3, based on a period until the privilege gaming state determined by the period determination unit is started, a variable time specification that specifies a time for changing the contents of the closing period suggesting effect by the effect variable unit A gaming machine H4 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H3, the contents of the closing period suggesting effect are varied by the effect varying means based on the period until the multi-privileged gaming state is determined by the period determining means. Since the time is specified by the variable time specifying means, the execution period of the effect after being changed by the effect changing means can be made constant regardless of the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information to be executed and the execution period. There is an effect.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hits having different numbers of rounds (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, in such a gaming machine, since the player can recognize the number of rounds determined according to the type of winning, the winning game simply becomes a work of digesting the determined number of rounds. In some cases, the player may not be able to enjoy the game being played.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is an effect execution means for executing an effect, a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, and a player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means. Special game transition means for shifting the state to an advantageous special game state, a entrance to which a predetermined valuable value is given by entering the ball, and a ball can enter as the state of the entrance Open / close setting means for setting the open state and the closed state in which the entry of the ball is restricted in one of the bonus game states, and a period for setting the entrance position to the closed state by the open / close setting means. A closing period setting means for setting a closing period, wherein the effect executing means is an image displayed in an effect executed in the closed period in an effect executed in a predetermined period after the privilege gaming state is ended. Same as closed period image To display an image.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is the gaming machine of technical idea 1, wherein the privilege gaming state has a plurality of types in which the number of times of the open state set by the opening / closing setting means is different from each other. Yes, the privilege game transition means selects and sets one type from among the plurality of types of privilege game states when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein a period for determining whether or not a period of the same length as the closed period has elapsed after the privilege gaming state has ended. A determining means; and an end suggesting effect executing means for executing an end suggesting effect suggesting the end of the privilege gaming state when the period determining means determines that a period of the same length as the closed period has elapsed. .
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, the effect is executed by the effect execution means. Further, when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the privilege game transition means shifts to a privilege game state advantageous to the player. When a ball enters the entrance, a predetermined valuable value is given, and the entrance is opened and closed between an open state where the ball can enter and a closed state where the entrance of the ball is restricted The closed period setting means sets a closing period, which is a period set by the setting means in one privilege game state, and the opening and closing setting means sets the entrance position to the closed state. In the effect executed by the effect executing means in a predetermined period after the bonus game state is ended, the same image as the closed period image displayed in the effect executed in the closed period is displayed.
Thereby, it can be made to feel as if the privilege game state continues during the predetermined period after the privilege game state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make it feel as if the privileged gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a longer period of time, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the privilege gaming state includes a plurality of types having different numbers of open states set by the opening / closing setting means. And when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, one type is selected and set from among a plurality of types of privilege game states by the privilege game transfer means, It is possible to make it difficult to predict the number of open states to be set. Further, since the closed period image is displayed in a predetermined period, when the open period is set a plurality of times, whether the open period is one privilege gaming state or a specific lottery result in the predetermined period, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the open period has been set a plurality of times as a result of shifting to the gaming state a plurality of times. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game in the bonus game state while expecting that many open periods are set, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, whether or not a period of the same length as the closing period has elapsed after the award gaming state has ended. Is determined by the period determining means, and when it is determined that a period of the same length as the closing period has elapsed, an end suggesting effect suggesting the end of the privilege gaming state is executed by the end suggesting effect executing means. There is an effect that the person can recognize that the privilege gaming state has ended.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
65a Specific winning entrance (entrance means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
S212 determination means S213 privilege game execution means S305 dynamic display execution means S403, part of S405 determination period setting means S503, part of S505 determination period setting means S1203, S1206 entry state setting means S1617 specific effect execution means

Claims (2)

Display means capable of displaying the effect mode;
A determination means for performing a predetermined determination;
A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result;
A determination period determining means for determining a determination period which is a period until the determination result is shown according to the determination result of the determination based on execution of the determination by the determination means;
A ball entry means to which a predetermined privilege is given when a game ball enters,
As the state of the ball entrance means, a first state playing ball capable ball entrance, entrance to set in its second state entry ball game ball than the first state becomes difficult, the benefits game of 1 Sphere state setting means;
A period setting means for setting a second state period is a period in which state Ru is the second state of the entering sphere means by the input spheres state setting means,
A second state period display that is a display element displayed at least during the second state period on the display means based on the end of the first state set last in one of the privilege games A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in which at least some of the display elements are displayed on the display means;
As the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, the first specific effect in a mode suggested to be in the first state, and the first state is less likely to be in the first state than the first specific effect. A type determining means for determining one type from among a plurality of types including at least the second specific rendering of the suggested mode;
The specific demonstration execution unit state, and are not to execute the specific effect on a particular effect period determined Me pre,
The specific effect is at least executed in at least one or more of the determination periods set after the bonus game is ended,
The specific effect period, when the first specific effect is executed, a feature that you have been configured with the length effect period of the first specific effect is terminated in accordance with the start of the benefits game To play.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is provided at a position visible to a player.

Images